US20120040935A1 - Compositions useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated ion channels - Google Patents

Compositions useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated ion channels Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20120040935A1
US20120040935A1 US13/110,173 US201113110173A US2012040935A1 US 20120040935 A1 US20120040935 A1 US 20120040935A1 US 201113110173 A US201113110173 A US 201113110173A US 2012040935 A1 US2012040935 A1 US 2012040935A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
ring
pain
optionally substituted
alkyl
compounds
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US13/110,173
Inventor
Dean M. Wilson
Andreas P. Termin
Timothy D. Neubert
Jian Wang
Yulian Zhang
Jesus E. Gonzalez, III
Esther Martinborough
Nicole Zimmerman
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Vertex Pharmaceuticals Inc
Original Assignee
Vertex Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Vertex Pharmaceuticals Inc filed Critical Vertex Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority to US13/110,173 priority Critical patent/US20120040935A1/en
Publication of US20120040935A1 publication Critical patent/US20120040935A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A61K31/517Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic ring systems, e.g. quinazoline, perimidine
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/10Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the bladder
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P15/00Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A61P21/02Muscle relaxants, e.g. for tetanus or cramps
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/02Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for peripheral neuropathies
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/04Centrally acting analgesics, e.g. opioids
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/06Antimigraine agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/08Antiepileptics; Anticonvulsants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/22Anxiolytics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/24Antidepressants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/12Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for electrolyte homeostasis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/12Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for electrolyte homeostasis
    • A61P3/14Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for electrolyte homeostasis for calcium homeostasis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/06Antiarrhythmics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D239/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
    • C07D239/70Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D239/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
    • C07D239/70Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D239/72Quinazolines; Hydrogenated quinazolines
    • C07D239/86Quinazolines; Hydrogenated quinazolines with hetero atoms directly attached in position 4
    • C07D239/88Oxygen atoms
    • C07D239/91Oxygen atoms with aryl or aralkyl radicals attached in position 2 or 3
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D239/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
    • C07D239/70Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D239/72Quinazolines; Hydrogenated quinazolines
    • C07D239/86Quinazolines; Hydrogenated quinazolines with hetero atoms directly attached in position 4
    • C07D239/94Nitrogen atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/14Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/04Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/12Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/12Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/04Ortho-condensed systems
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D495/00Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D495/02Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D495/04Ortho-condensed systems

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to compounds useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated sodium channels and calcium channels.
  • the invention also provides pharmaceutically acceptable compositions comprising the compounds of the invention and methods of using the compositions in the treatment of various disorders.
  • Na channels are central to the generation of action potentials in all excitable cells such as neurons and myocytes. They play key roles in excitable tissue including brain, smooth muscles of the gastrointestinal tract, skeletal muscle, the peripheral nervous system, spinal cord and airway. As such they play key roles in a variety of disease states such as epilepsy (See, Moulard, B. and D. Bertrand (2002) “Epilepsy and sodium channel blockers” Expert Opin. Ther. Patents 12(1): 85-91)), pain (See, Waxman, S. G., S. Dib-Hajj, et al. (1999) “Sodium channels and pain” Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 96(14): 7635-9 and Waxman, S. G., T. R.
  • Voltage gated Na channels comprise a gene family consisting of 9 different subtypes (NaV1.1-NaV1.9). As shown in Table 1, these subtypes show tissue specific localization and functional differences (See, Goldin, A. L. (2001) “Resurgence of sodium channel research” Annu Rev Physiol 63: 871-94). Three members of the gene family (NaV1.8, 1.9, 1.5) are resistant to block by the well-known Na channel blocker TTX, demonstrating subtype specificity within this gene family. Mutational analysis has identified glutamate 387 as a critical residue for TTX binding (See, Noda, M., H. Suzuki, et al. (1989) “A single point mutation confers tetrodotoxin and saxitoxin insensitivity on the sodium channel II” FEBS Lett 259(1): 213-6).
  • CNS central nervous system
  • PNS peripheral nervous sytem
  • DRG dorsal root ganglion
  • TG Trigeminal ganglion
  • NaVs voltage-gated sodium channels
  • Antagonists of NaV channels can attenuate these pain signals and are useful for treating a variety of pain conditions, including but not limited to acute, chronic, inflammatory, and neuropathic pain.
  • Known NaV antagonists such as TTX, lidocaine (See, Mao, J. and L. L. Chen (2000) “Systemic lidocaine for neuropathic pain relief” Pain 87(1): 7-17.) bupivacaine, phenyloin (See, Jensen, T. S.
  • Hyperalgesia extreme sensitivity to something painful
  • Voltage sensitive sodium channels activation is critical for the generation and propagation of neuronal action potentials.
  • modulation of NaV currents is an endogenous mechanism used to control neuronal excitability (See, Goldin, A. L. (2001) “Resurgence of sodium channel research” Annu Rev Physiol 63: 871-94.).
  • DRG dorsal root ganglion
  • TTX-resistant current is insensitive to micromolar concentrations of tetrodotoxin, and displays slow activation and inactivation kinetics and a more depolarized activation threshold when compared to other voltage-gated sodium channels.
  • TTX-resistant sodium currents are primarily restricted to a subpopulation of sensory neurons likely to be involved in nociception. Specifically, TTX-resistant sodium currents are expressed almost exclusively in neurons that have a small cell-body diameter; and give rise to small-diameter slow-conducting axons and that are responsive to capsaicin.
  • a large body of experimental evidence demonstrates that TTX-resistant sodium channels are expressed on C-fibers and are important in the transmission of nociceptive information to the spinal cord.
  • Intrathecal administration of antisense oligo-deoxynucleotides targeting a unique region of the TTX-resistant sodium channel (NaV1.8) resulted in a significant reduction in PGE 2 -induced hyperalgesia (See, Khasar, S. G., M. S. Gold, et al. (1998) “A tetrodotoxin-resistant sodium current mediates inflammatory pain in the rat” Neurosci Lett 256(1): 17-20). More recently, a knockout mouse line was generated by Wood and colleagues, which lacks functional NaV1.8. The mutation has an analgesic effect in tests assessing the animal's response to the inflammatory agent carrageenan (See, Akopian, A. N., V.
  • NaV1.8 protein is upregulated along uninjured C-fibers adjacent to the nerve injury.
  • Antisense treatment prevents the redistribution of NaV1.8 along the nerve and reverses neuropathic pain.
  • expression of NaV1.8 and NaV1.9 are greatly reduced whereas expression of the TTX sensitive subunit NaV1.3 is significantly upregulated in animal models of neuropathic pain.
  • NaV1.3 channel proteins are expressed in the central and peripheral systems of man. (See, Chen, Y. H., Dale, T. J., et al. (2000) “Cloning, distribution and functional analysis of the type III sodium channel from human brain.” Eur. J. Neurosci. 12: 4281-89). Furthermore, in the periphery, NaV1.3 channel proteins are detectable in injured but not uninjured human nerves indicating that NaV1.3 plays important physiological roles under pathophysiological conditions in humans as well.
  • NaV1.3 overexpression may also be associated with increased epileptic neuronal activity as it is significantly upregulated in hippocampal pyramidal neurons of epileptic humans (See, Whitaker, W. R. J., Faull, M., et al. (2001) “Changes in the mRNAs encoding voltage-gated sodium channel types II and III in human epileptic hippocampus.” Neurosci. 106(2): 275-285.); inhibitors with some selectivity against Nav1.3 could also be particularly attractive anticonvulsants and neuroprotectants.
  • NaV1.9 is similar to NaV1.8 as it is selectively localized to small sensory neurons of the dorsal root ganglion and trigeminal ganglion (See, Fang, X., L. Djouhri, et al. (2002). “The presence and role of the tetrodotoxin-resistant sodium channel Na(v)1.9 (NaN) in nociceptive primary afferent neurons.” J Neurosci 22(17): 7425-33.). It has a slow rate of inactivation and left-shifted voltage dependence for activation (See, Dib-Hajj, S., J. A. Black, et al.
  • NaV1.9 sodium channel with unique properties
  • the resting membrane potential of NaV1.9 expressing cells is in the ⁇ 55 to ⁇ 50 mV range compared to ⁇ 65 mV for most other peripheral and central neurons.
  • This persistent depolarization is in large part due to the sustained low-level activation of NaV1.9 channels. This depolarization allows the neurons to more easily reach the threshold for firing action potentials in response to nociceptive stimuli.
  • Compounds that block the NaV1.9 channel may play an important role in establishing the set point for detection of painful stimuli.
  • NaV1.8 and NaV1.7 are also expressed in dorsal root ganglion neurons and contribute to the small TTX sensitive component seen in these cells.
  • NaV1.7 in particular my therefore be a potential pain target in addition to it's role in neuroendocrine excitability (See, Klugbauer, N., L. Lacinova, et al. (1995) “Structure and functional expression of a new member of the tetrodotoxin-sensitive voltage-activated sodium channel family from human neuroendocrine cells” Embo J 14(6): 1084-90).
  • NaV1.1 See, Sugawara, T., E. Mazaki-Miyazaki, et al. (2001) “Nav1.1 mutations cause febrile seizures associated with afebrile partial seizures.” Neurology 57(4): 703-5.
  • NaV1.2 See, Sugawara, T., Y. Tsurubuchi, et al. (2001) “A missense mutation of the Na+ channel alpha II subunit gene Na(v)1.2 in a patient with febrile and afebrile seizures causes channel dysfunction” Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 98(11): 6384-9) have been linked to epilepsy conditions including febrile seizures.
  • Antagonists for NaV1.5 have been developed and used to treat cardiac arrythmias.
  • a gene defect in NaV1.5 that produces a larger noninactivating component to the current has been linked to long QT in man and the orally available local anesthetic mexilitine has been used to treat this condition (See, Wang, D. W., K. Yazawa, et al. (1997) “Pharmacological targeting of long QT mutant sodium channels.” J Clin Invest 99(7): 1714-20).
  • Na channel blockers are currently used or being tested in the clinic to treat epilepsy (See, Moulard, B. and D. Bertrand (2002) “Epilepsy and sodium channel blockers” Expert Opin. Ther. Patents 12(1): 85-91.); acute (See, Wiffen, P., S. Collins, et al. (2000) “Anticonvulsant drugs for acute and chronic pain” Cochrane Database Syst Rev 3), chronic (See, Wiffen, P., S. Collins, et al. (2000) “Anticonvulsant drugs for acute and chronic pain” Cochrane Database Syst Rev 3, and Guay, D. R.
  • Narasimhan (1997) “Sodium channels and therapy of central nervous system diseases” Adv Pharmacol 39: 47-98) and as anesthetics (See, Strichartz, G. R., Z. Zhou, et al. (2002) “Therapeutic concentrations of local anaesthetics unveil the potential role of sodium channels in neuropathic pain.” Novartis Found Symp 241: 189-201).
  • Voltage-gated calcium channels are membrane-spanning, multi-subunit proteins that open in response to membrane depolarization, allowing Ca entry from the extracellular milieu.
  • Calcium channels were initially classified based on the time and voltage-dependence of channel opening and on the sensitivity to pharmacological block. The categories were low-voltage activated (primarily T-type) and high-voltage activated (L,N,P,Q or R-type). This classification scheme was replaced by a nomenclature based upon the molecular subunit composition, as summarized in Table I (Hockerman, G. H., et. al. (1997) Annu Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 37: 361-96; Striessnig, J. (1999) Cell. Physiol. Biochem. 9: 242-69).
  • the ⁇ 1 subunit is the primary determinant of the pharmacological properties and contains the channel pore and voltage sensor (Hockerman, G. H., et. al. (1997) Annu Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 37: 361-96; Striessnig, J. (1999) Cell. Physiol. Biochem. 9: 242-69).
  • Ten isoforms of the ⁇ 1 subunit are known, as indicated in Table I.
  • the ⁇ 2 ⁇ subunit consists of two disulfide linked subunits, ⁇ 2 , which is primarily extracellular and a transmembrane ⁇ subunit.
  • Four isoforms of ⁇ 2 ⁇ are known, ⁇ 2 ⁇ -1, ⁇ 2 ⁇ -2, ⁇ 2 ⁇ -3 and ⁇ 2 ⁇ -4.
  • the ⁇ subunit is a non-glycosylated cytoplasmic protein that binds to the ⁇ 1 subunit.
  • Four isoforms are known, termed ⁇ 1 to ⁇ 4 .
  • the ⁇ subunit is a transmembrane protein that has been biochemically isolated as a component of Ca v 1 and Ca v 2 channels. At least 8 isoforms are known ( ⁇ 1 to ⁇ 8 ) (Kang, M. G. and K. P. Campbell (2003) J. Biol. Chem. 278: 21315-8). The nomenclature for voltage-gated calcium channels is based upon the content of the ⁇ 1 subunit, as indicated in Table I. Each type of ⁇ 1 subunit can associate with a variety of ⁇ , ⁇ 2 ⁇ or ⁇ subunits, so that each Ca v type corresponds to many different combinations of subunits.
  • Ca v 2 currents are found almost exclusively in the central and peripheral nervous system and in neuroendocrine cells and constitute the predominant forms of presynaptic voltage-gated calcium current. Presynaptic action potentials cause channel opening and neurotransmitter release is steeply dependent upon the subsequent calcium entry. Thus, Ca v 2 channels play a central role in mediating neurotransmitter release.
  • Ca v 2.1 and Ca v 2.2 contain high affinity binding sites for the peptide toxins co-conotoxin-MVIIC and co-conotoxin-GVIA, respectively, and these peptides have been used to determine the distribution and function of each channel type.
  • Ca v 2.2 is highly expressed at the presynaptic nerve terminals of neurons from the dorsal root ganglion and neurons of lamina I and II of the dorsal horn (Westenbroek, R. E., et al. (1998) J. Neurosci. 18: 6319-30; Cizkova, D, et al. (2002) Exp. Brain Res. 147: 456-63).
  • Ca v 2.2 channels are also found in presynaptic terminals between second and third order interneurons in the spinal cord. Both sites of neurotransmission are very important in relaying pain information to the brain.
  • Acute pain serves an important protective function in keeping the organism safe from stimuli that may produce tissue damage. Severe thermal, mechanical, or chemical inputs have the potential to cause severe damage to the organism if unheeded.
  • Acute pain serves to quickly remove the individual from the damaging environment. Acute pain by its very nature generally is short lasting and intense. Inflammatory pain, on the other hand, may last for much longer periods of time and its intensity is more graded. Inflammation may occur for many reasons including tissue damage, autoimmune response, and pathogen invasion.
  • Inflammatory pain is mediated by a variety of agents that are released during inflammation, including substance P, histamines, acid, prostaglandin, bradykinin, CGRP, cytokines, ATP, and other agents (Julius, D. and A. I. Basbaum (2001) Nature 413 (6852): 203-10).
  • the third class of pain is neuropathic and involves nerve damage arising from nerve injury or viral infection and results in reorganization of neuronal proteins and circuits yielding a pathologic “sensitized” state that can produce chronic pain lasting for years. This type of pain provides no adaptive benefit and is particularly difficult to treat with existing therapies.
  • Pain, particularly neuropathic and intractable pain is a large unmet medical need. Millions of individuals suffer from severe pain that is not well controlled by current therapeutics.
  • the current drugs used to treat pain include NSAIDS, COX-2 inhibitors, opioids, tricyclic antidepressants, and anticonvulsants.
  • Neuropathic pain has been particularly difficult to treat as it does not respond well to opioids until high doses are reached.
  • Gabapentin is currently the most widely used therapeutic for the treatment of neuropathic pain, although it works in only 60% of patients and has modest efficacy. The drug is generally safe, although sedation is an issue at higher doses.
  • Cav2.2 as a target for the treatment of neuropathic pain is provided by studies with ziconotide (also known as ⁇ -conotoxin-MVIIA), a selective peptide blocker of this channel (Bowersox, S. S., et al. (1996) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 279: 1243-9; Jain, K. K. (2000) Exp. Opin. Invest. Drugs 9: 2403-10; Vanegas, H. and H. Schaible (2000) Pain 85: 9-18).
  • ziconotide also known as ⁇ -conotoxin-MVIIA
  • a selective peptide blocker of this channel Bosox, S. S., et al. (1996) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 279: 1243-9; Jain, K. K. (2000) Exp. Opin. Invest. Drugs 9: 2403-10; Vanegas, H. and H. Schaible (2000) Pain 85: 9-18.
  • the toxin has an 85% success rate for the treatment of pain in humans with a greater potency than morphine.
  • An orally available antagonist of Ca V 2.2 should have similar efficacy without the need for intrathecal infusion.
  • Ca V 2.1 and Ca V 2.3 are also in neurons of nociceptive pathways and antagonists of these channels could be used to treat pain.
  • Antagonists of Ca V 2.1, Ca V 2.2 or Ca V 2.3 should also be useful for treating other pathologies of the central nervous system that apparently involve excessive calcium entry. Cerebral ischaemia and stroke are associated with excessive calcium entry due to depolarization of neurons.
  • the Ca v 2.2 antagonist ziconotide is effective in reducing infarct size in a focal ischemia model using laboratory animals, suggesting that Ca V 2.2 antagonists could be used for the treatment of stroke.
  • reducing excessive calcium influx into neurons may be useful for the treatment of epilepsy, traumatic brain injury, Alzheimer's disease, multi-infarct dementia and other classes of dementia, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, amnesia, or neuronal damage caused by poison or other toxic substances.
  • Ca V 2.2 also mediates release of neurotransmitters from neurons of the sympathetic nervous system and antagonists could be used to treat cardiovascular diseases such as hypertension, cardiac arrhythmia, angina pectoris, myocardial infarction, and congestive heart failure.
  • R 1 , R 2 , X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 , p, and Ring A are as defined below.
  • These compounds, and pharmaceutically acceptable compositions thereof, are useful for treating or lessening the severity of a variety of diseases, disorders, or conditions, including, but not limited to, acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain, arthritis, migrane, cluster headaches, trigeminal neuralgia, herpetic neuralgia, general neuralgias, epilepsy or epilepsy conditions, neurodegenerative disorders, psychiatric disorders such as anxiety and depression, myotonia, arrhythmia, movement disorders, neuroendocrine disorders, ataxia, multiple sclerosis, irritable bowel syndrome, and incontinence.
  • diseases, disorders, or conditions including, but not limited to, acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain, arthritis, migrane, cluster headaches, trigeminal neuralgia, herpetic neuralgia, general neuralgias, epilepsy or epilepsy conditions, neurodegenerative disorders, psychiatric disorders such as anxiety and depression, myotonia, arrhythmia,
  • the present invention relates to compound of formula I useful as inhibitor of voltage-gated sodium channels:
  • p 0, 1 or 2;
  • X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 are each independently selected from NR 3 , C ⁇ O, CHR 4 , S, O, S ⁇ O, or SO 2 , as valency and stability permit;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 aliphatic, a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or R 1 and R 2 , taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, wherein R 1 , R 2 , or any ring formed by R 1 and R 2 taken together, are each independently optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-4 occurrences of —R 5 , and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R 6 ;
  • Ring A is a 5-6 membered monocyclic or 8-10 membered bicyclic aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-5 occurrences of —R 7 , and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R 8 ;
  • each occurrence of R 4 , R 5 , and R 7 is independently Q-R X ; wherein Q is a bond or is a C 1 -C 6 alkylidene chain wherein up to two non-adjacent methylene units of Q are optionally and independently replaced by CO, CO 2 , COCO, CONR, OCONR, NRNR, NRNRCO, NRCO, NRCO 2 , NRCONR, SO, SO 2 , NRSO 2 , SO 2 NR, NRSO 2 NR, O, S, or NR;
  • each occurrence of Rx is independently selected from R′, halogen, NO 2 , or CN;
  • each occurrence of R is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic group
  • each occurrence of R′ is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-8 aliphatic, C 6-10 aryl, a heteroaryl ring having 5-10 ring atoms, or a heterocyclyl ring having 3-10 ring atoms, or wherein R and R′ taken together with the atom(s) to which they are bound, or two occurrences of R′ taken together with the atom(s) to which they are bound, form a 5-8 membered cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; and
  • each occurrence of R 3 , R 6 or R 8 is independently R′, —COR′, —CO 2 (C 1-6 aliphatic), —CON(R′) 2 , or —SO 2 R′.
  • R 1 is not hydrogen when R 2 is optionally substituted indazol-3-yl;
  • R 1 is not hydrogen when R 2 is optionally substituted pyrazol-3-yl;
  • R 1 is not hydrogen when R 2 is 1,2,4-triazol-3-yl;
  • compounds of the invention may optionally be substituted with one or more substituents, such as are illustrated generally above, or as exemplified by particular classes, subclasses, and species of the invention. It will be appreciated that the phrase “optionally substituted” is used interchangeably with the phrase “substituted or unsubstituted.” In general, the term “substituted”, whether preceded by the term “optionally” or not, refers to the replacement of hydrogen radicals in a given structure with the radical of a specified substituent.
  • an optionally substituted group may have a substituent at each substitutable position of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure may be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at every position.
  • Combinations of substituents envisioned by this invention are preferably those that result in the formation of stable or chemically feasible compounds.
  • the term “stable”, as used herein, refers to compounds that are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allow for their production, detection, and preferably their recovery, purification, and use for one or more of the purposes disclosed herein.
  • a stable compound or chemically feasible compound is one that is not substantially altered when kept at a temperature of 40° C. or less, in the absence of moisture or other chemically reactive conditions, for at least a week.
  • aliphatic or “aliphatic group”, as used herein, means a straight-chain (i.e., unbranched) or branched, substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon chain that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, or a monocyclic hydrocarbon or bicyclic hydrocarbon that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic (also referred to herein as “carbocycle” “cycloaliphatic” or “cycloalkyl”), that has a single point of attachment to the rest of the molecule. Unless otherwise specified, aliphatic groups contain 1-20 aliphatic carbon atoms.
  • aliphatic groups contain 1-10 aliphatic carbon atoms. In other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-8 aliphatic carbon atoms. In still other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-6 aliphatic carbon atoms, and in yet other embodiments aliphatic groups contain 1-4 aliphatic carbon atoms.
  • cycloaliphatic refers to a monocyclic C 3 -C 8 hydrocarbon or bicyclic C 8 -C 12 hydrocarbon that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic, that has a single point of attachment to the rest of the molecule wherein any individual ring in said bicyclic ring system has 3-7 members.
  • Suitable aliphatic groups include, but are not limited to, linear or branched, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl groups and hybrids thereof such as (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (cycloalkenyl)alkyl or (cycloalkyl)alkenyl.
  • heteroaliphatic means aliphatic groups wherein one or two carbon atoms are independently replaced by one or more of oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus, or silicon. Heteroaliphatic groups may be substituted or unsubstituted, branched or unbranched, cyclic or acyclic, and include “heterocycle”, “heterocyclyl”, “heterocycloaliphatic”, or “heterocyclic” groups.
  • heterocycle means non-aromatic, monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic ring systems in which one or more ring members is an independently selected heteroatom.
  • the “heterocycle”, “heterocyclyl”, “heterocycloaliphatic”, or “heterocyclic” group has three to fourteen ring members in which one or more ring members is a heteroatom independently selected from oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, or phosphorus, and each ring in the system contains 3 to 7 ring members.
  • heteroatom means one or more of oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus, or silicon (including, any oxidized form of nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, or silicon; the quaternized form of any basic nitrogen or; a substitutable nitrogen of a heterocyclic ring, for example N (as in 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrrolyl), NH (as in pyrrolidinyl) or NR + (as in N-substituted pyrrolidinyl)).
  • unsaturated means that a moiety has one or more units of unsaturation.
  • alkoxy refers to an alkyl group, as previously defined, attached to the principal carbon chain through an oxygen (“alkoxy”) or sulfur (“thioalkyl”) atom.
  • haloalkyl means alkyl, alkenyl or alkoxy, as the case may be, substituted with one or more halogen atoms.
  • halogen means F, Cl, Br, or I.
  • aryl used alone or as part of a larger moiety as in “aralkyl”, “aralkoxy”, or “aryloxyalkyl”, refers to monocyclic, bicyclic, and tricyclic ring systems having a total of five to fourteen ring members, wherein at least one ring in the system is aromatic and wherein each ring in the system contains 3 to 7 ring members.
  • aryl may be used interchangeably with the term “aryl ring”.
  • aryl also refers to heteroaryl ring systems as defined hereinbelow.
  • heteroaryl used alone or as part of a larger moiety as in “heteroaralkyl” or “heteroarylalkoxy”, refers to monocyclic, bicyclic, and tricyclic ring systems having a total of five to fourteen ring members, wherein at least one ring in the system is aromatic, at least one ring in the system contains one or more heteroatoms, and wherein each ring in the system contains 3 to 7 ring members.
  • heteroaryl may be used interchangeably with the term “heteroaryl ring” or the term “heteroaromatic”.
  • An aryl (including aralkyl, aralkoxy, aryloxyalkyl and the like) or heteroaryl (including heteroaralkyl and heteroarylalkoxy and the like) group may contain one or more substituents. Suitable substituents on the unsaturated carbon atom of an aryl or heteroaryl group are selected from halogen; —R ° ; —OR ° ; —SR ° ; 1,2-methylene-dioxy; 1,2-ethylenedioxy; phenyl (Ph) optionally substituted with R ° ; —O(Ph) optionally substituted with R ° ; —(CH 2 ) 1-2 (Ph), optionally substituted with R ° ; —CH ⁇ CH(Ph), optionally substituted with R ° ; —NO 2 ; —CN; —N(R ° ) 2 ; —NR ° C(O)R ° ; —NR ° C(O)N(R
  • Optional substituents on the aliphatic group of R ° are selected from NH 2 , NH(C 1-4 aliphatic), N(C 1-4 aliphatic) 2 , halogen, C 1-4 aliphatic, OH, O(C 1-4 aliphatic), NO 2 , CN, CO 2 H, CO 2 (C 1-4 aliphatic), O(haloC 1-4 aliphatic), or haloC 1-4 aliphatic, wherein each of the foregoing C 1-4 aliphatic groups of R ° is unsubstituted.
  • An aliphatic or heteroaliphatic group, or a non-aromatic heterocyclic ring may contain one or more substituents. Suitable substituents on the saturated carbon of an aliphatic or heteroaliphatic group, or of a non-aromatic heterocyclic ring are selected from those listed above for the unsaturated carbon of an aryl or heteroaryl group and additionally include the following: ⁇ O, ⁇ S, ⁇ NNHR*, ⁇ NN(R*) 2 , ⁇ NNHC(O)R*, ⁇ NNHCO 2 (alkyl), ⁇ NNHSO 2 (alkyl), or ⁇ NR*, where each R* is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic.
  • Optional substituents on the aliphatic group of R* are selected from NH 2 , NH(C 1-4 aliphatic), N(C 1-4 aliphatic) 2 , halogen, C 1-4 aliphatic, OH, O(C 1-4 aliphatic), NO 2 , CN, CO 2 H, CO 2 (C 1-4 aliphatic), O(halo C 1-4 aliphatic), or halo(C 1-4 aliphatic), wherein each of the foregoing C 1-4 aliphatic groups of R* is unsubstituted.
  • Optional substituents on the nitrogen of a non-aromatic heterocyclic ring are selected from —R + , —N(R + ) 2 , —C(O)R + , —CO 2 R + , —C(O)C(O)R + , —C(O)CH 2 C(O)R + , —SO 2 R + , —SO 2 N(R + ) 2 , —C( ⁇ S)N(R + ) 2 , —C( ⁇ NH)—N(R + ) 2 , or —NR + SO 2 R + ; wherein R + is hydrogen, an optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted —O(Ph), optionally substituted —CH 2 (Ph), optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) 1-2 (Ph); optionally substituted —CH ⁇ CH(Ph); or an unsubstituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl or hetero
  • Optional substituents on the aliphatic group or the phenyl ring of R + are selected from NH 2 , NH(C 1-4 aliphatic), N(C 1-4 aliphatic) 2 , halogen, C 1-4 aliphatic, OH, O(C 1-4 aliphatic), NO 2 , CN, CO 2 H, CO 2 (C 1-4 aliphatic), O(halo C 1-4 aliphatic), or halo(C 1-4 aliphatic), wherein each of the foregoing C 1-4 aliphatic groups of R + is unsubstituted.
  • alkylidene chain refers to a straight or branched carbon chain that may be fully saturated or have one or more units of unsaturation and has two points of attachment to the rest of the molecule.
  • two independent occurrences of R ° are taken with the atom(s) to which each variable is bound to form a 3-8-membered cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Exemplary rings that are formed when two independent occurrences of R ° (or R + , or any other variable similarly defined herein) are taken together with the atom(s) to which each variable is bound include, but are not limited to the following: a) two independent occurrences of R ° (or R + , or any other variable similarly defined herein) that are bound to the same atom and are taken together with that atom to form a ring, for example, N(R ° ) 2 , where both occurrences of R ° are taken together with the nitrogen atom to form a piperidin-1-yl, piperazin-1-yl, or morpholin-4-yl group; and b) two independent occurrences of R ° (or R + , or any other variable similarly defined herein) that are bound to different atoms and are taken together with both of those atoms to form a ring, for example where a phenyl group is substituted with two occurrences of OR °
  • structures depicted herein are also meant to include all isomeric (e.g., enantiomeric, diastereomeric, and geometric (or conformational)) forms of the structure; for example, the R and S configurations for each asymmetric center, (Z) and (E) double bond isomers, and (Z) and (E) conformational isomers. Therefore, single stereochemical isomers as well as enantiomeric, diastereomeric, and geometric (or conformational) mixtures of the present compounds are within the scope of the invention. Unless otherwise stated, all tautomeric forms of the compounds of the invention are within the scope of the invention.
  • structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds that differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms.
  • compounds having the present structures except for the replacement of hydrogen by deuterium or tritium, or the replacement of a carbon by a 13 C- or 14 C-enriched carbon are within the scope of this invention.
  • Such compounds are useful, for example, as analytical tools or probes in biological assays.
  • the present invention provides a compound wherein p is 0 or 1 In certain other embodiments, p is 0. Or, p is 1. Or, in certain embodiments, p is 2.
  • the present invention provides a compound wherein Ring A is a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-5 occurrences of —R 7 , and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R 8 , wherein R 7 and R 8 are as defined above.
  • X 1 , X 2 , and X 4 are CH 2
  • X 3 is CH-Me or N—(C 1-4 alkyl)
  • N-benzyl p is 0, 1 or 2
  • R 1 is methyl and R 2 is furan-2-ylmethyl, dimethylaminoethyl, or methyl
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together form piperidinyl, piperazinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, 4-C 1-4 alkoxypiperidinyl, morpholinyl, 4-carboxy-C 1-4 alkylpiperazinyl, or 4-C 1-4 alkylsulfonylpiperazinyl
  • ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-hydroxy-6-fluorophenyl, phenyl-2-disodium phosphate, or pyrrolyl.
  • X 1 , X 2 , and X 4 are CH 2 , and X 3 is CH-Me or N-Me, p is 1, R 1 is methyl and R 2 is furan-2-ylmethyl or methyl, or R 1 and R 2 taken together form piperidinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl, or 4-C 1-4 alkylsulfonylpiperazinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl or 2-hydroxy-6-fluorophenyl.
  • X 1 , X 2 , and X 4 are CH 2 , and X 3 is CH-Me, p is 1, R 1 is methyl and R 2 is furan-2-ylmethyl or methyl, or R 1 and R 2 taken together form piperidinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, or 4-C 1-4 alkylsulfonylpiperazinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl or 2-hydroxy-6-fluorophenyl.
  • X 1 , X 2 , and X 4 are CH 2 , and X 3 is CH-Me, p is 1, R 1 and R 2 taken together form 4-methylpiperidinyl or 4-C 1-4 alkylsulfonylpiperazinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxy or 2-hydroxy-6-fluorophenyl.
  • X 1 , and X 2 are CH 2
  • X 4 is CHOH or CH 2
  • X 3 is CH 2 , CH-Me, or C(O)-Me
  • p is 1
  • R 1 is methyl and R 2 methyl or methylaminoethyl
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together form 1-piperidinyl, 1-piperazinyl, or 4-methylpiperazinyl
  • ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, or 1-pyrrolyl.
  • X 1 , X 2 , and X 4 are CH 2 , and X 3 is CH 2 or CH-Me, p is 1, R 1 is methyl and R 2 methyl or methylaminoethyl, or R 1 and R 2 taken together form 1-piperazinyl or 4-methylpiperazinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl or 1-pyrrolyl.
  • X 1 and X 4 are CH 2 , X 2 is CH 2 , CHMe, or C(O)OMe, and X 3 is N-benzyl, N-(3-methoxybenzyl), N-(4-carboxymethylbenzyl), CH 2 , or CH-Me, p is 1, R 1 is methyl or benzyl and R 2 is methyl or dimethylaminoethyl, or R 1 and R 2 taken together form a 1-piperazinyl, 1-piperidinyl, 4-carboxyethylpiperazinyl, 4-C 1-4 alkylsulfonyl piperazinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, 4-methoxypiperidinyl, 4-methylpiperazinyl, 3-diethylaminocarbonylpiperidinyl, or morpholinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, or 1-pyrrolyl.
  • X 1 , X 2 , and X 4 are CH 2
  • X 3 is N-benzyl, N-(3-methoxybenzyl), N-(4-carboxymethylbenzyl), CH 2 , or CH-Me
  • p is 1
  • R 1 is methyl or benzyl and R 2 is methyl or dimethylaminoethyl
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together form a 1-piperazinyl, 1-piperidinyl, 4-carboxyethylpiperazinyl, 4-C 1-4 alkylsulfonyl piperazinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, 4-methoxypiperidinyl, 3-diethylaminocarbonylpiperidinyl, or morpholinyl
  • ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, or 1-pyrrolyl.
  • X 1 , X 2 , and X 4 are CH 2
  • X 3 is N-benzyl, N-(3-methoxybenzyl), N-(4-carboxymethylbenzyl), or CH-Me
  • p is 1
  • R 1 is methyl or benzyl and R 2 is methyl or dimethylaminoethyl
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together form a 4-C 1-4 alkylsulfonyl piperazinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, or 3-diethylaminocarbonylpiperidinyl
  • ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl or 2-methoxyphenyl.
  • X 1 , X 2 , and X 4 are CH 2
  • X 3 is N-(3-methoxybenzyl) or CH-Me
  • p is 1
  • R 1 and R 2 are both methyl
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together form a 4-methylsulfonylpiperazinyl or 4-ethylsulfonylpiperazinyl
  • ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl or 2-methoxyphenyl.
  • X 1 , X 2 , and X 4 are CH 2
  • X 3 is CH 2 or CH-Me
  • p is 1
  • R 1 and R 2 each are methyl or R 1 and R 2 taken together form 1-piperazinyl
  • ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl or 1-pyrrolyl.
  • the present invention provides a compound of formula I′:
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 aliphatic, a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or R 1 and R 2 , taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, wherein R 1 , R 2 , or any ring formed by R 1 and R 2 taken together, are each independently optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-4 occurrences of —R 5 , and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R 6 ;
  • Ring A is a 5-6 membered monocyclic or 8-10 membered bicyclic aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-5 occurrences of —R 7 , and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R 8 ;
  • x is 0-6;
  • p 0, 1, or 2;
  • each occurrence of R 4 , R 5 , and R 7 is independently Q-Rx; wherein Q is a bond or is a C 1 -C 6 alkylidene chain wherein up to two non-adjacent methylene units of Q are optionally and independently replaced by CO, CO 2 , COCO, CONR, OCONR, NRNR, NRNRCO, NRCO, NRCO 2 , NRCONR, SO, SO 2 , NRSO 2 , SO 2 NR, NRSO 2 NR, O, S, or NR;
  • each occurrence of R is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic group
  • each occurrence of R′ is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-8 aliphatic, C 6-10 aryl, a heteroaryl ring having 5-10 ring atoms, or a heterocyclyl ring having 3-10 ring atoms, or wherein R and R′ taken together with the atom(s) to which they are bound, or two occurrences of R′ taken together with the atom(s) to which they are bound, form a 5-8 membered cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; and
  • each occurrence of R 6 or R 8 is independently R′, —COR′, —CO 2 (C 1-6 aliphatic), —CON(R′) 2 , or —SO 2 R′.
  • p is 1 and compounds have the structure as shown in I-B.
  • ring A is pyrrolyl, pyridyl, fluorophenyl, hydroxyphenyl, acyloxyphenyl, hydroxy-fluorophenyl, methoxyphenyl, phenyl-phosphate disodium salt, methylpiperidyl, ethyl-carbamic acid phenyl ester;
  • x is 0-2, and R 4 is C 1-4 alkyl optionally substituted with hydroxy, C 1-4 alkoxy, or halo, hydroxy, C 1-4 alkylcarbonyloxy or carbo(C 1-4 alkoxy);
  • R 1 is hydrogen, C 1-4 alkyl, or benzyl
  • R 2 is C 1-4 alkyl, di(C 1-4 alkyl)amino-C 1-4 alkyl, 2-(2′-tetrahydrofuranyl)methyl, 2-hydroxy-1-methyl-ethyl, or imidazol-5-yl-ethyl, or
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together form a ring selected from N-pyrrolidinyl, N-piperidinyl, N-piperazinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, (C 1-4 alkyl)sulfonylpiperazinyl, wherein said ring is optionally substituted with up to 3 substituents selected from halo, oxo, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, —O— C 1-4 alkyl, C 1-4 alkyl optionally substituted with hydroxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, di(C 1-4 alkyl)aminocarbonyl, or carboxy.
  • ring A is 1-pyrrolyl, 2-pyridyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-acyloxyphenyl, 2-hydroxy-6-fluorophenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, phenyl-2-phosphate disodium salt, or 4-methylpiperidyl, 2-ethyl-carbamic acid phenyl ester
  • x is 0, or x is 1 and R 4 is 6-methyl, 7-methyl, 8-hydroxy, or 2-t-butylcarbonyloxy, or x is 2, and R 4 is 6-carboxymethyl and 7-carboxymethyl;
  • R 1 is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, or benzyl
  • R 2 is methyl, ethyl, dimethylaminoethyl, 2-(2′-tetrahydrofuranyl)methyl, 2-hydroxy-1-methyl-ethyl, methylaminoethyl, imidazol-5-yl-ethyl, or
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together form 4-methoxypiperidinyl, N-pyrrolidinyl, 3-trifluoromethyl-1-pyrrolidinyl, 4-butylsulfonyl-piperazinyl, 1-piperidinyl, 1-piperazinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, 4-hydroxypiperidinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 4-methylsulfonylpiperazinyl, 4-ethylsulfonylpiperazinyl, 4-isopropylsulfonylpiperazinyl, N-piperidinyl, 3-diethylaminocarbonyl-1-piperidinyl, 4-oxo-piperidinyl, 3-aminocarbonyl-piperidinyl, 4-methylpiperazinyl, or 4-carboxyethyl-piperazinyl.
  • ring A is 2-pyridyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-acyloxyphenyl, 2-hydroxy-6-fluorophenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, or 4-methylpiperidyl
  • x is 0, or x is 1 and R 4 is 6-methyl, 7-methyl, or 8-hydroxy
  • R 1 is methyl, ethyl, or benzyl
  • R 2 is methyl, ethyl, dimethylaminoethyl, or 2-(2′-tetrahydrofuranyl)methyl, or R 1 and R 2 taken together form 4-methoxypiperidinyl, N-pyrrolidinyl, 4-butylsulfonyl-piperazinyl, piperidinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, 4-hydroxypiperidinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 4-methylsulfonylpiperazinyl, 4-ethylsulfonylpiperazinylpiperazinyl,
  • ring A is 2-pyridyl, 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-acyloxyphenyl, 2-hydroxy-6-fluorophenyl, or 4-methylpiperidyl
  • x is 0, or x is 1 and R 4 is 7-methyl
  • R 1 is methyl and R 2 is methyl or 2-(2′-tetrahydrofuranyl)methyl
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together form 4-butylsulfonyl-piperazinyl, piperidinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 4-methylsulfonylpiperazinyl, 4-ethylsulfonylpiperazinyl, 4-piperidinyl, or 4-carboxyethyl-piperazinyl.
  • ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl, R 1 and R 2 , taken together, form a 1-piperidinyl ring, x is 1, and R 4 is 7-methyl.
  • neither R 1 nor R 2 is hydrogen
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, 0, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2 .
  • both R 1 and R 2 are each independently an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2 .
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2
  • preferred R 1 and R 2 groups are each independently optionally substituted methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, n-propyl, propenyl, cyclobutyl, (CO)OCH 2 CH 3 , (CH 2 ) 2 OCH 3 , CH 2 (CO)OCH 2 CH 3 , CH 2 (CO)OCH 3 , CH(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 3 , or t-butyl, or n-butyl.
  • one of R 1 or R 2 is hydrogen and the other of R 1 or R 2 is a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • one of R 1 or R 2 is hydrogen, and the other of R 1 or R 2 is an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2 .
  • R 1 or R 2 is a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or a 3-7 membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S
  • preferred R 1 and R 2 groups are selected from:
  • each R 5 and R 6 are as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4.
  • Most preferred rings include those shown below in Table 2.
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen or oxygen.
  • R 1 and R 2 are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound and form a 3-8 membered heterocyclyl group selected from:
  • each R 5 and R 6 are as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4.
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together are optionally substituted pyrrolidin-1-yl (ff), piperidin1-yl (dd), piperazin-1-yl (cc), or morpholin-4-yl (ee).
  • z is 0-2. In other preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, z is 0 and the ring is unsubstituted.
  • Preferred R 5 groups of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, when present, are independently halogen, CN, NO 2 , or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , OR′, —CH 2 OR′, SR′, —CH 2 SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 5 groups are each independently Cl, Br, F, CF 3 , Me, Et, CN, NO 2 , —COOH, NH 2 , —N(CH 3 ) 2 , —N(Et) 2 , —N(iPr) 2 , —O(CH 2 ) 2 OCH 3 , —CONH 2 , —COOCH 3 , —OH, —CH 2 OH, —NHCOCH 3 , —SO 2 NH 2 , SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy.
  • Most preferred R 5 groups include those shown below in Table 2.
  • R 6 groups are independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 OR′, —CH 2 SR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 6 groups are each independently H, Me, CF 3 , ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CONH 2 , —COO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CH 2 OH, —SO 2 NH 2 , SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , or optionally substituted phenyl.
  • Most preferred R 6 groups of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C include those shown below in Table 2.
  • x is 0, 1, or 2 and each R 4 is independently hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO 2 , or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , OR′, —CH 2 OR′, SR′, —CH 2 SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • each R 4 is independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF 3 , Me, Et, CN, NO 2 , —COOH, NH 2 , —N(CH 3 ) 2 , —N(Et) 2 , —N(iPr) 2 , —O(CH 2 ) 2 OCH 3 , —CONH 2 , —COOCH 3 , —OH, —CH 2 OH, —NHCOCH 3 , —SO 2 NH 2 , SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy.
  • two occurrences of R 4 taken together form an optionally substituted 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • two occurrences of R 4 taken together form a cycloalkyl group and compounds have the structure as shown in formula I-B-i:
  • R 4 groups of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C include those shown below in Table 2.
  • Ring A is a phenyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrrolyl, piperidinyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzotriazolyl, pyrazolyl, benzopyrazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, thiazolyl, benzthizolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, triazolyl, benzotriazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, furanoyl, benzofuranoyl, or triazinyl ring, each optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with
  • Ring A can be attached to the pyrimidinyl ring through any available carbon or nitrogen atom (e.g., a thiazole ring can be attached in the 2-, 4-, or 5-position).
  • Ring A is optionally substituted phenyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, or 4-pyridyl:
  • each y is independently 0-5 and R 7 is as defined generally above and herein.
  • y is 0-2. In other preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, y is 0 and Ring A is unsubstituted.
  • R 7 groups are independently hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO 2 , or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , OR′, —CH 2 OR′, SR′, —CH 2 SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 7 groups are each independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF 3 , Me, Et, CN, NO 2 , —COOH, NH 2 , —N(CH 3 ) 2 , —N(Et) 2 , —N(iPr) 2 , —O(CH 2 ) 2 OCH 3 , —CONH 2 , —COOCH 3 , —OH, —CH 2 OH, —NHCOCH 3 , —SO 2 NH 2 , SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy.
  • Most preferred R 7 groups of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C include those shown below in Table 2.
  • R 8 groups are independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 OR′, —CH 2 SR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 8 groups are each independently H, Me, CF 3 , ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CONH 2 , —COO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CH 2 OH, —SO 2 NH 2 , SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , or optionally substituted phenyl.
  • Most preferred R 8 groups of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C include those shown below in Table 2.
  • Ring A is optionally substituted phenyl and compounds of formula II are provided:
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 4 , R 7 , p, and y are as defined generally and in subsets above and herein.
  • Ring A is phenyl and compounds have the structure shown in formula II-A, II-B, or II-C.
  • neither R 1 nor R 2 is hydrogen, and R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S; a 3-7 membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2 .
  • both R 1 and R 2 are an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2 .
  • R 1 and R 2 are an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2
  • preferred R 1 and R 2 groups are optionally substituted methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, n-propyl, propenyl, cyclobutyl, (CO)OCH 2 CH 3 , (CH 2 ) 2 OCH 3 , CH 2 (CO)OCH 2 CH 3 , CH 2 (CO)OCH 3 , CH(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 3 , or t-butyl, or n-butyl.
  • one of R 1 or R 2 is hydrogen and the other of R 1 or R 2 is a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • one of R 1 or R 2 is hydrogen, and the other of R 1 or R 2 is an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2 .
  • R 1 or R 2 is a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or a 3-7 membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S
  • preferred R 1 and R 2 groups are selected from:
  • each R 5 and R 6 are as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4.
  • Most preferred rings include those shown below in Table 2.
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen or oxygen.
  • R 1 and R 2 are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound and form a 3-8 membered heterocyclyl group selected from:
  • each of R 5 and R 6 are as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4.
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together are optionally substituted pyrrolidin-1-yl (ff), piperidin1-yl (dd), piperazin-1-yl (cc), or morpholin-4-yl (ee).
  • z is 0-2. In other preferred embodiments of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, z is 0 and the ring is unsubstituted.
  • R 5 groups of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, when present, are independently halogen, CN, NO 2 , or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , OR′, —CH 2 OR′, SR′, —CH 2 SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 5 groups are each independently Cl, Br, F, CF 3 , Me, Et, CN, NO 2 , —COOH, NH 2 , —N(CH 3 ) 2 , —N(Et) 2 , —N(iPr) 2 , —O(CH 2 ) 2 OCH 3 , —CONH 2 , —COOCH 3 , —OH, —CH 2 OH, —NHCOCH 3 , —SO 2 NH 2 , SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy.
  • Most preferred R 5 groups of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C include those shown below in Table 2.
  • R 6 groups are independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 ) alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 OR′, —CH 2 SR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 6 groups are each independently H, Me, CF 3 , ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CONH 2 , —COO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CH 2 OH, —SO 2 NH 2 , SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , or optionally substituted phenyl.
  • R 6 groups of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C include those shown below in Table 2.
  • x is 0, 1, or 2 and each R 4 is independently hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO 2 , or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , OR′, —CH 2 OR′, SR′, —CH 2 SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • each R 3 is independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF 3 , Me, Et, CN, NO 2 , —COOH, NH 2 , —N(CH 3 ) 2 , —N(Et) 2 , —N(iPr) 2 , —O(CH 2 ) 2 OCH 3 , —CONH 2 , —COOCH 3 , —OH, —CH 2 OH, —NHCOCH 3 , —SO 2 NH 2 , SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy.
  • two occurrences of R 4 taken together form an optionally substituted 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • two occurrences of R 4 taken together form a cycloalkyl group and compounds have the structure as shown in formula II-B-i:
  • R 4 groups of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C include those shown below in Table 2.
  • R 7 groups are independently hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO 2 , or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , OR′, —CH 2 OR′, SR′, —CH 2 SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 7 groups are each independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF 3 , Me, Et, CN, NO 2 , —COOH, NH 2 , —N(CH 3 ) 2 , —N(Et) 2 , —N(iPr) 2 , —O(CH 2 ) 2 OCH 3 , —CONH 2 , —COOCH 3 , —OH, —CH 2 OH, —NHCOCH 3 , —SO 2 NH 2 , SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy.
  • Most preferred R 7 groups include those shown below in Table 2.
  • y is 1 and compounds have the general formula III:
  • R 7 is halogen, CN, NO 2 , or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-4 alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , —OR′, —CH 2 OR′, —SR′, —CH 2 SR′, —COOR′, —NRCOR′, —CON(R′) 2 , or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • p is 0, 1, or 2
  • compounds have the structure of formula III-A, III-B, or III-C:
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 4 , and x are described generally above and herein, and each R 7 is independently halogen, CN, NO 2 , or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-4 alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , —OR′, —CH 2 OR′, —SR′, —CH 2 SR′, —COOR′, —NRCOR′, —CON(R′) 2 , or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • x is 0, R 7 is hydroxy, R 1 and R 2 are both C 1-4 alkyl, or R 1 and R 2 , taken together, form a pyrrolidyl, piperidinyl, or morpholinyl ring.
  • x is 0, R 7 is hydroxy, R 1 and R 2 are both methyl, or R 1 and R 2 , taken together, form a pyrrolidyl or piperidinyl ring.
  • x is 0, R 7 is hydroxy, R 1 and R 2 are both methyl, or R 1 and R 2 , taken together, form a pyrrolidyl ring.
  • compounds of the invention are defined according to formula III, III-A, III-B, or III-C and one or more of, or all of, R 1 , R 2 , R 4 or x are further defined according to one or more of, or all of, the following groups:
  • compounds of the invention are defined according to formula III, III-A, III-B, or III-C and one or more of, or all of, R 1 , R 2 , R 4 , x, or R 7 are further defined according to one or more of, or all of, the following groups:
  • compounds of the invention are defined according to formula III, III-A, III-B, or III-C and one or more of, or all of, R 1 , R 2 , R 4 , x, or R 7 are further defined according to one or more of, or all of, the following groups:
  • formula III-C has one or more of the following features:
  • the present invention provides a compound of formula IV:
  • p 0, 1 or 2;
  • X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 are each independently selected from NR 3 , CO ⁇ O, CHR 4 , S, O, S ⁇ O, or SO 2 , as valency and stability permit, provided that that X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 are not each simultaneously CHR 4 ;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 aliphatic, a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or R 1 and R 2 , taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, wherein R 1 , R 2 , or any ring formed by R 1 and R 2 taken together, are each independently optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-4 occurrences of —R 5 , and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R 6 ;
  • Ring A is a 5-6 membered monocyclic or 8-10 membered bicyclic aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-5 occurrences of —R 7 , and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R 8 ;
  • each occurrence of R 4 , R 5 , and R 7 is independently Q-R X ; wherein Q is a bond or is a C 1-6 alkylidene chain wherein up to two non-adjacent methylene units of Q are optionally and independently replaced by CO, CO 2 , COCO, CONR, OCONR, NRNR, NRNRCO, NRCO, NRCO 2 , NRCONR, SO, SO 2 , NRSO 2 , SO 2 NR, NRSO 2 NR, O, S, or NR;
  • each occurrence of Rx is independently selected from R′, halogen, NO 2 , or CN;
  • each occurrence of R′ is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-8 aliphatic, C 6-10 aryl, a heteroaryl ring having 5-10 ring atoms, or a heterocyclyl ring having 3-10 ring atoms, or wherein R and R′ taken together with the atom(s) to which they are bound, or two occurrences of R′ taken together with the atom(s) to which they are bound, form a 5-8 membered cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; and
  • each occurrence of R 3 , R 6 or R 8 is independently R′, —COR′, —CO 2 (C 1-6 aliphatic), —CON(R′) 2 , or —SO 2 R′.
  • R 1 is not hydrogen when R 2 is optionally substituted indazol-3-yl;
  • R 1 is not hydrogen when R 2 is optionally substituted pyrazol-3-yl;
  • R 1 is not hydrogen when R 2 is 1,2,4-triazol-3-yl;
  • p is 0, 1, or 2
  • X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 are each independently selected from NR 3 , CHR 4 , S, O, S ⁇ O, or SO 2 , as valency and stability permit, provided that when p is 1, X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 are not each simultaneously CHR 4 , or when p is 0, X 1 , X 2 , and X 3 are not each simultaneously CHR 4 .
  • p is 0 or 1.
  • one or two of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , or X 4 is NR 3 , S, O, S ⁇ O, or SO 2 , and the remaining one, two, or three are each CHR 4 .
  • one of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , or X 4 is NR 3 , S, or O, and the remaining two (when p is 0) or three (when p is 1) are each CHR 4 , and compounds have one of the following structures:
  • each R 1 , R 2 , Ring A, X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 is as defined above and herein.
  • the sulfur ring atom is replaced with sulfoxy. Or, the sulfur ring atom is replaced with sulfonyl.
  • neither R 1 nor R 2 is hydrogen
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2 .
  • both R 1 and R 2 are an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2 .
  • R 1 and R 2 are an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2
  • preferred R 1 and R 2 groups are optionally substituted methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, n-propyl, propenyl, cyclobutyl, (CO)OCH 2 CH 3 , (CH 2 ) 2 OCH 3 , CH 2 (CO)OCH 2 CH 3 , CH 2 (CO)OCH 3 , CH(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 3 , or t-butyl, or n-butyl.
  • Most preferred R 1 and R 2 groups of formula IV include those shown below in Table 2.
  • one of R 1 or R 2 is hydrogen and the other of R 1 or R 2 is a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • one of R 1 or R 2 is hydrogen, and the other of R 1 or R 2 is an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2 .
  • R 1 or R 2 is a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S
  • preferred R 1 and R 2 groups are selected from:
  • each R 5 and R 6 is as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4.
  • Most preferred rings include those shown below in Table 2.
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen or oxygen.
  • R 1 and R 2 are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound and form a 3-8 membered heterocyclyl group selected from:
  • each R 5 and R 6 is as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4.
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together are optionally substituted pyrrolidin-1-yl (ff), piperidin1-yl (dd), piperazin-1-yl (cc), or morpholin-4-yl (ee).
  • z is 0-2. In other preferred embodiments of formula IV, z is 0 and the ring is unsubstituted.
  • R 5 groups of formula IV when present, are independently halogen, CN, NO 2 , or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , OR′, —CH 2 OR′, SR′, —CH 2 SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , SO 2 R′, or —SO 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 5 groups are each independently Cl, Br, F, CF 3 , Me, Et, CN, NO 2 , —COOH, NH 2 , —N(CH 3 ) 2 , —N(Et) 2 , —N(iPr) 2 , —O(CH 2 ) 2 OCH 3 , —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CONH 2 , —COOCH 3 , —OH, —CH 2 OH, —NHCOCH 3 , —SO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —SO 2 NH 2 , —SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy.
  • Most preferred R 5 groups of formula IV include those shown below in Table 2.
  • R 6 groups are independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 OR′, —CH 2 SR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , SO 2 R′, or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 6 groups are each independently H, Me, CF 3 , ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CONH 2 , —COO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CH 2 OH, —SO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —SO 2 NH 2 , SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , or optionally substituted phenyl or benzyl.
  • Most preferred R 6 groups of formula IV include those shown below in Table 2.
  • R 4 groups are independently hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO 2 , or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , OR′, —CH 2 OR′, SR′, —CH 2 SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , SO 2 R′, or —SO 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 4 groups are each independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF 3 , Me, Et, CN, NO 2 , —COOH, NH 2 , —N(CH 3 ) 2 , —N(Et) 2 , —N(iPr) 2 , —O(CH 2 ) 2 OCH 3 , —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CONH 2 , —COOCH 3 , —OH, —CH 2 OH, —NHCOCH 3 , —SO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —SO 2 NH 2 , —SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy.
  • Most preferred R 4 groups of formula IV include those shown below in Table 2.
  • R 3 groups are independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 OR′, —CH 2 SR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , SO 2 R′, or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 3 groups are each independently H, Me, CF 3 , ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CONH 2 , —COO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CH 2 OH, —SO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —SO 2 NH 2 , SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , or optionally substituted phenyl or benzyl.
  • Most preferred R 3 groups of formula IV include those shown below in Table 2.
  • Ring A is a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-5 occurrences of —R 7 , and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R 8 .
  • Ring A is a phenyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrrolyl, piperidinyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzotriazolyl, pyrazolyl, benzopyrazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, thiazolyl, benzthizolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, triazolyl, benzotriazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, furanoyl, benzofuranoyl, or triazinyl ring, each optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-5 occurrences
  • Ring A can be attached to the pyrimidinyl ring through any available carbon or nitrogen atom (e.g., a thiazole ring can be attached in the 2-, 4-, or 5-position).
  • Ring A is optionally substituted phenyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, or 4-pyridyl:
  • each y is independently 0-5 and each R 7 is as defined generally above.
  • y is 0-2. In other preferred embodiments of formula IV, y is 0 and Ring A is unsubstituted.
  • R 7 groups are independently hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO 2 , or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , OR′, —CH 2 OR′, SR′, —CH 2 SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , SO 2 R′, or —SO 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 7 groups are each independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF 3 , Me, Et, CN, NO 2 , —COOH, NH 2 , —N(CH 3 ) 2 , —N(Et) 2 , —N(iPr) 2 , —O(CH 2 ) 2 OCH 3 , —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CONH 2 , —COOCH 3 , —OH, —CH 2 OH, —NHCOCH 3 , —SO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —SO 2 NH 2 , —SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy.
  • Most preferred R 7 groups of formula IV include those shown below in Table 2.
  • R 8 groups are independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 OR′, —CH 2 SR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , SO 2 R′, or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 8 groups are each independently H, Me, CF 3 , ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CONH 2 , —COO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CH 2 OH, —SO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —SO 2 NH 2 , SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , or optionally substituted phenyl or benzyl.
  • Most preferred R 8 groups of formula IV include those shown below in Table 2.
  • R 1 hydrogen or methyl
  • R 2 is methyl, 5-methyl-pyrazol-3-yl, 5-fluoro-benzopyrazol-3-yl, or benzopyrazol-3-yl
  • X 1 , X 3 , and X 4 each is CH 2
  • R 3 is hydrogen, acyl, 1-oxo-2-methoxy-ethyl, 1-oxo-propyl, methylsulfonyl, ethylsulfonyl, benzyl
  • ring A is phenyl optionally substituted with halo, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, C 1-4 alkyl, or C 1-4 alkoxy, preferably, methoxy, or ring A is 2,3-Dihydro-benzo[1,4]dioxin-3-yl.
  • R 1 hydrogen or methyl
  • R 2 is methyl, 5-methyl-pyrazol-3-yl, 5-fluoro-benzopyrazol-3-yl, or benzopyrazol-3-yl
  • X 1 , X 3 , and X 4 each is CH 2
  • R 3 is hydrogen or benzyl
  • ring A is phenyl optionally substituted with halo, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, C 1-4 alkyl, or C 1-4 alkoxy, preferably, methoxy, or ring A is 2,3-Dihydro-benzo[1,4]dioxin-3-yl.
  • R 1 hydrogen or methyl
  • R 2 is methyl, 5-methyl-pyrazol-3-yl, 5-fluoro-benzopyrazol-3-yl, or benzopyrazol-3-yl
  • X 1 , X 3 , and X 4 each is CH 2
  • R 3 is hydrogen or benzyl
  • ring A is phenyl optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy or C 1-4 alkoxy, preferably, methoxy.
  • R 1 is hydrogen or methyl
  • R 2 is methyl or 5-fluorobenzimidazol-3-yl, 5-methylimidazol-3-yl
  • X 1 , X 3 , and X 4 each is CH 2
  • R 3 is hydrogen, C 1-4 alkyl, benzyl optionally substituted with carboxy-C 1-4 alkyl, C 1-4 alkylsulfonyl, acyl, methylcarboxyethyl, C 1-4 alkylcarbonyl, methoxymethylcarbonyl, or benzoyl
  • ring A is phenyl substituted with 2-hydroxy, 2-trifluoromethyl, 4-methyl, 4-carboxylic acid, 4-trifluoromethyloxy, or 2-C 1-4 alkoxy, preferably, methoxy.
  • R 1 is hydrogen or methyl
  • R 2 is methyl or 5-fluorobenzimidazol-3-yl
  • X 1 , X 3 , and X 4 each is CH 2
  • R 3 is C 1-4 alkyl
  • benzyl optionally substituted with carboxy-C 1-4 alkyl, C 1-4 alkylsulfonyl, acyl, methylcarboxyethyl, C 1-4 alkylcarbonyl, or benzoyl
  • ring A is phenyl substituted with 2-hydroxy, 2-trifluoromethyl, or 2-C 1-4 alkoxy, preferably, methoxy.
  • R 1 and R 2 each is methyl
  • X 1 , X 3 , and X 4 each is CH 2
  • R 3 is C 1-4 alkyl
  • ring A is phenyl substituted with 2-hydroxy or 2-C 1-4 alkoxy, preferably, methoxy.
  • R 1 and R 2 each is methyl
  • X 1 , X 3 , and X 4 each is CH 2
  • R 3 is C 1-4 alkyl, or benzyl optionally substituted with carboxy-C 1-4 alkyl
  • ring A is phenyl substituted with 2-hydroxy or 2-C 1-4 alkoxy, preferably, methoxy.
  • R 1 and R 2 each is methyl
  • X 1 , X 3 , and X 4 each is CH 2
  • R 3 is C 1-4 alkyl
  • ring A is 2-hydroxy phenyl or 2-C 1-4 alkoxyphenyl.
  • R 1 and R 2 each is methyl
  • X 1 , X 3 , and X 4 each is CH 2
  • R 3 is benzyl optionally substituted with carboxy-C 1-4 alkyl, C 1-4 alkoxy
  • ring A is 2-hydroxy phenyl.
  • R 1 is hydrogen or methyl
  • R 2 is methyl
  • benzimidazol-3-yl 5-methyl-imidazol-3-yl
  • ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 2-trifluoromethylphenyl or phenyl.
  • R 1 is hydrogen or methyl
  • R 2 is methyl
  • benzimidazol-3-yl 5-methyl-imidazol-3-yl
  • ring A is 2-trifluoromethylphenyl or phenyl.
  • Ring A is optionally substituted phenyl, and compounds of formula V are provided:
  • R 1 , R 2 , X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 , R 7 and y are as defined generally and in subsets above and herein.
  • one or two of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , or X 4 is independently NR 3 , S, C ⁇ O, O, S ⁇ O, or SO 2 , and the remaining two or three are each CHR 4 .
  • one of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , or X 4 is NR 3 , S, or O, and the remaining three are each CHR 4 , and compounds have one of the following structures:
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 aliphatic, a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or R 1 and R 2 , taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, wherein R 1 , R 2 , or any ring formed by R 1 and R 2 taken together, are each independently optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-4 occurrences of —R 5 , and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R 6 .
  • neither R 1 nor R 2 is hydrogen
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2 .
  • both R 1 and R 2 are an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2 .
  • R 1 and R 2 are an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2
  • preferred R 1 and R 2 groups are optionally substituted methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, n-propyl, propenyl, cyclobutyl, (CO)OCH 2 CH 3 , (CH 2 ) 2 OCH 3 , CH 2 (CO)OCH 2 CH 3 , CH 2 (CO)OCH 3 , CH(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 3 , or t-butyl, or n-butyl.
  • Most preferred R 1 and R 2 groups of any of formulae V-A through V-N include those shown below in Table 2.
  • one of R 1 or R 2 is hydrogen and the other of R 1 or R 2 is a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • one of R 1 or R 2 is hydrogen, and the other of R 1 or R 2 is an optionally substituted C 1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C 1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO 2 (NR), or (NR)SO 2 .
  • R 1 or R 2 is a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S
  • preferred R 1 and R 2 groups are selected from:
  • each R 5 and R 6 is as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4.
  • Most preferred rings include those shown below in Table 2.
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen or oxygen.
  • R 1 and R 2 are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound and form a 3-8 membered heterocyclyl group selected from:
  • each R 5 and R 6 is as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4.
  • R 1 and R 2 taken together are optionally substituted pyrrolidin-1-yl (ff), piperidin1-yl (dd), piperazin-1-yl (cc), or morpholin-4-yl (ee).
  • R 1 or R 2 is a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7 membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or when R 1 and R 2 , taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, the ring can be substituted with up to four independent occurrences of R 5 .
  • z is 0-2. In other preferred embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N, z is 0 and the ring is unsubstituted.
  • Preferred R 5 groups of any of formulae V-A through V-N, when present, are independently halogen, CN, NO 2 , or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , OR′, —CH 2 OR′, SR′, —CH 2 SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , SO 2 R′, or —SO 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 5 groups are each independently Cl, Br, F, CF 3 , Me, Et, CN, NO 2 , —COOH, NH 2 , —N(CH 3 ) 2 , —N(Et) 2 , —N(iPr) 2 , —O(CH 2 ) 2 OCH 3 , —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CONH 2 , —COOCH 3 , —OH, —CH 2 OH, —NHCOCH 3 , —SO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —SO 2 NH 2 , —SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy.
  • R 6 groups are independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 OR′, —CH 2 SR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , SO 2 R′, or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 6 groups are each independently H, Me, CF 3 , ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CONH 2 , —COO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CH 2 OH, —SO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —SO 2 NH 2 , SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , or optionally substituted phenyl or benzyl.
  • Most preferred R 6 groups of any of formulae V-A through V-N include those shown below in Table 2.
  • R 4 groups are independently hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO 2 , or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R) 2 , OR′, —CH 2 OR′, SR′, —CH 2 SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , SO 2 R′, or —SO 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 4 groups are each independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF 3 , Me, Et, CN, NO 2 , —COOH, NH 2 , —N(CH 3 ) 2 , —N(Et) 2 , —N(iPr) 2 , —O(CH 2 ) 2 OCH 3 , —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CONH 2 , —COOCH 3 , —OH, —CH 2 OH, —NHCOCH 3 , —SO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —SO 2 NH 2 , —SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy.
  • R 3 groups are hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1-6 )alkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 OR′, —CH 2 SR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 N(R′) 2 , —(CH 2 ) 2 OR′, —(CH 2 ) 2 SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′) 2 , SO 2 R′, or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 3 groups are each independently H, Me, CF 3 , ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CONH 2 , —COO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CH 2 OH, —SO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —SO 2 NH 2 , SO 2 N(CH 3 ) 2 , or optionally substituted phenyl or benzyl.
  • Most preferred R 3 groups of any of formulae V-A through V-N include those shown below in Table 2.
  • R 7 is halogen, CN, NO 2 , or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-4 alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , —OR′, —CH 2 OR′, —SR′, —CH 2 SR′, —COOR′, —NRCOR′, —CON(R′) 2 , or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • R 7 is halogen, CN, NO 2 , or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-4 alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, —N(R′) 2 , —CH 2 N(R′) 2 , —OR′, —CH 2 OR′, —SR′, —CH 2 SR′, —COOR′, —NRCOR′, —CON(R′) 2 , or —S(O) 2 N(R′) 2 .
  • compounds of the invention are defined according to any of formulae VI, VI-A, VI-B, VI-C, VI-D, VI-E, VI-F, VI-G, VI-H, VI-I, VI-J, VI-K, VI-L, VI-M, or VI-N, and one or more of, or all of, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 or R 4 are further defined according to one or more of, or all of, the following groups:
  • compounds of the invention are defined according to any of formulae VI, VI-A, VI-B, VI-C, VI-D, VI-E, VI-F, VI-G, VI-H, VI-I, VI-J, VI-K, VI-L, VI-M, or VI-N, and one or more of, or all of, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 or R 4 are further defined according to one or more of, or all of, the following groups:
  • compounds of the invention are defined according to any of formulae VI, VI-A, VI-B, VI-C, VI-D, VI-E, VI-F, VI-G, VI-H, VI-I, VI-J, VI-K, VI-L, VI-M, or VI-N, and one or more of, or all of, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 or R 7 are further defined according to one or more of, or all of, the following groups:
  • the compounds of this invention may be prepared in general by methods known to those skilled in the art for analogous compounds, as illustrated by the general scheme below, and the preparative examples that follow.
  • reaction of a desired heterocyclohexanone-1-carboxylate and an amidine in ethanol with NaOEt at 0° C., and subsequent reaction with phosphorus oxychloride, boron tribromide and a desired amine, followed by debenzylation and reaction with an appropriate chloride generates compounds of general formula I′.
  • reaction of a desired cyclohexanone-1-carboxylate and an amidine in ethanol with NaOEt at 0° C., and subsequent reaction with phosphorus oxychloride, boron tribromide, and a desired amine generates compounds of general formula I′.
  • Ring A represents an N-linked heteroaryl or heterocyclyl group (as depicted below in Scheme R, where two occurrences of R′ are taken together below to form an optionally substituted 5-8-membered cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur).
  • compounds of the invention are prepared via Diels-Alder reactions to provide substituted tetrohydroquinazoline moieties as depicted in Scheme S below:
  • the present invention provides compounds that are inhibitors of voltage-gated sodium ion channels, and thus the present compounds are useful for the treatment of diseases, disorders, and conditions including, but not limited to acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain, arthritis, migrane, cluster headaches, trigeminal neuralgia, herpetic neuralgia, general neuralgias, epilepsy or epilepsy conditions, neurodegenerative disorders, psychiatric disorders such as anxiety and depression, myotonia, arrythmia, movement disorders, neuroendocrine disorders, ataxia, multiple sclerosis, irritable bowel syndrome, and incontinence.
  • diseases, disorders, and conditions including, but not limited to acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain, arthritis, migrane, cluster headaches, trigeminal neuralgia, herpetic neuralgia, general neuralgias, epilepsy or epilepsy conditions, neurodegenerative disorders, psychiatric disorders such as anxiety and depression, myotonia, ar
  • compositions comprising any of the compounds as described herein, and optionally comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, adjuvant or vehicle.
  • these compositions optionally further comprise one or more additional therapeutic agents.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative includes, but is not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, salts of such esters, or any other adduct or derivative which upon administration to a patient in need is capable of providing, directly or indirectly, a compound as otherwise described herein, or a metabolite or residue thereof.
  • the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to those salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgement, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • a “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” means any non-toxic salt or salt of an ester of a compound of this invention that, upon administration to a recipient, is capable of providing, either directly or indirectly, a compound of this invention or an inhibitorily active metabolite or residue thereof.
  • the term “inhibitorily active metabolite or residue thereof” means that a metabolite or residue thereof is also an inhibitor of a voltage-gated sodium ion channel.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge, et al. describe pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 1977, 66, 1-19, incorporated herein by reference.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of this invention include those derived from suitable inorganic and organic acids and bases.
  • Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable, nontoxic acid addition salts are salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid or with organic acids such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange.
  • salts include adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, gluconate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, pectinate,
  • Salts derived from appropriate bases include alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, ammonium and N 30 (C 1-4 alkyl) 4 salts. This invention also envisions the quaternization of any basic nitrogen-containing groups of the compounds disclosed herein. Water or oil-soluble or dispersable products may be obtained by such quaternization.
  • Representative alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and the like.
  • Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, loweralkyl sulfonate and aryl sulfonate.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable compositions of the present invention additionally comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, adjuvant, or vehicle, which, as used herein, includes any and all solvents, diluents, or other liquid vehicle, dispersion or suspension aids, surface active agents, isotonic agents, thickening or emulsifying agents, preservatives, solid binders, lubricants and the like, as suited to the particular dosage form desired.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, adjuvant, or vehicle which, as used herein, includes any and all solvents, diluents, or other liquid vehicle, dispersion or suspension aids, surface active agents, isotonic agents, thickening or emulsifying agents, preservatives, solid binders, lubricants and the like, as suited to the particular dosage form desired.
  • Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Sixteenth Edition, E. W. Martin (Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1980) discloses various carriers used in formulating pharmaceutically acceptable compositions
  • any conventional carrier medium is incompatible with the compounds of the invention, such as by producing any undesirable biological effect or otherwise interacting in a deleterious manner with any other component(s) of the pharmaceutically acceptable composition, its use is contemplated to be within the scope of this invention.
  • materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include, but are not limited to, ion exchangers, alumina, aluminum stearate, lecithin, serum proteins, such as human serum albumin, buffer substances such as phosphates, glycine, sorbic acid, or potassium sorbate, partial glyceride mixtures of saturated vegetable fatty acids, water, salts or electrolytes, such as protamine sulfate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, potassium hydrogen phosphate, sodium chloride, zinc salts, colloidal silica, magnesium trisilicate, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyacrylates, waxes, polyethylene-polyoxypropylene-block polymers, wool fat, sugars such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; starches such as corn starch and potato starch; cellulose and its derivatives such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; powdered tragacanth; malt; gelatin; talc
  • a method for the treatment or lessening the severity of acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain, arthritis, migrane, cluster headaches, trigeminal neuralgia, herpetic neuralgia, general neuralgias, epilepsy or epilepsy conditions, neurodegenerative disorders, psychiatric disorders such as anxiety and depression, myotonia, arrythmia, movement disorders, neuroendocrine disorders, ataxia, multiple sclerosis, irritable bowel syndrome, or incontinence comprising administering an effective amount of a compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable composition comprising a compound to a subject in need thereof.
  • a method for the treatment or lessening the severity of acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain comprising administering an effective amount of a compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable composition to a subject in need thereof.
  • an “effective amount” of the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable composition is that amount effective for treating or lessening the severity of one or more of acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain, epilepsy or epilepsy conditions, neurodegenerative disorders, psychiatric disorders such as anxiety and depression, myotonia, arrythmia, movement disorders, neuroendocrine disorders, ataxia, multiple sclerosis, irritable bowel syndrome, or incontinence.
  • the compounds and compositions, according to the method of the present invention may be administered using any amount and any route of administration effective for treating or lessening the severity of one or more of acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain, epilepsy or epilepsy conditions, neurodegenerative disorders, psychiatric disorders such as anxiety and depression, myotonia, arrythmia, movement disorders, neuroendocrine disorders, ataxia, multiple sclerosis, irritable bowel syndrome, or incontinence.
  • the exact amount required will vary from subject to subject, depending on the species, age, and general condition of the subject, the severity of the infection, the particular agent, its mode of administration, and the like.
  • the compounds of the invention are preferably formulated in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage.
  • dose unit form refers to a physically discrete unit of agent appropriate for the patient to be treated. It will be understood, however, that the total daily usage of the compounds and compositions of the present invention will be decided by the attending physician within the scope of sound medical judgment.
  • the specific effective dose level for any particular patient or organism will depend upon a variety of factors including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; the activity of the specific compound employed; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidental with the specific compound employed, and like factors well known in the medical arts.
  • patient means an animal, preferably a mammal, and most preferably a human.
  • compositions of this invention can be administered to humans and other animals orally, rectally, parenterally, intracisternally, intravaginally, intraperitoneally, topically (as by powders, ointments, or drops), bucally, as an oral or nasal spray, or the like, depending on the severity of the infection being treated.
  • the compounds of the invention may be administered orally or parenterally at dosage levels of about 0.01 mg/kg to about 50 mg/kg and preferably from about 1 mg/kg to about 25 mg/kg, of subject body weight per day, one or more times a day, to obtain the desired therapeutic effect.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include, but are not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs.
  • the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethylformamide, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
  • the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubil
  • sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents.
  • the sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution, suspension or emulsion in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1,3-butanediol.
  • acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution, U.S.P. and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid are used in the preparation of injectables.
  • the injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium prior to use.
  • the rate of compound release can be controlled.
  • biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides).
  • Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the compound in liposomes or microemulsions that are compatible with body tissues.
  • compositions for rectal or vaginal administration are preferably suppositories which can be prepared by mixing the compounds of this invention with suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • Solid dosage forms for oral administration include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules.
  • the active compound is mixed with at least one inert, pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate and/or a) fillers or extenders such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and silicic acid, b) binders such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinylpyrrolidinone, sucrose, and acacia, c) humectants such as glycerol, d) disintegrating agents such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate, e) solution retarding agents such as paraffin, f) absorption accelerators such as quaternary ammonium compounds, g) wetting agents such as, for example, cetyl alcohol and gly
  • Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
  • the solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions that can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
  • the active compounds can also be in microencapsulated form with one or more excipients as noted above.
  • the solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings, release controlling coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art.
  • the active compound may be admixed with at least one inert diluent such as sucrose, lactose or starch.
  • Such dosage forms may also comprise, as is normal practice, additional substances other than inert diluents, e.g., tableting lubricants and other tableting aids such a magnesium stearate and microcrystalline cellulose.
  • the dosage forms may also comprise buffering agents. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner.
  • buffering agents include polymeric substances and waxes.
  • Dosage forms for topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants or patches.
  • the active component is admixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and any needed preservatives or buffers as may be required.
  • Ophthalmic formulation, eardrops, and eye drops are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.
  • the present invention contemplates the use of transdermal patches, which have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound to the body.
  • Such dosage forms are prepared by dissolving or dispensing the compound in the proper medium.
  • Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or by dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
  • the compounds of the invention are useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated sodium ion channels or calcium channels, preferably N-type calcium channels.
  • the compounds and compositions of the invention are inhibitors of one or more of NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2, and thus, without wishing to be bound by any particular theory, the compounds and compositions are particularly useful for treating or lessening the severity of a disease, condition, or disorder where activation or hyperactivity of one or more of NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2 is implicated in the disease, condition, or disorder.
  • NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2 When activation or hyperactivity of NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2, is implicated in a particular disease, condition, or disorder, the disease, condition, or disorder may also be referred to as a “NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8 or NaV1.9-mediated disease, condition or disorder” or a “CaV2.2-mediated condition or disorder”.
  • the present invention provides a method for treating or lessening the severity of a disease, condition, or disorder where activation or hyperactivity of one or more of NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2 is implicated in the disease state.
  • the activity of a compound utilized in this invention as an inhibitor of NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2 may be assayed according to methods described generally in the Examples herein, or according to methods available to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • compounds of the invention are useful as inhibitors of NaV1.8. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention are useful as inhibitors of NaV1.8 and CaV2.2. In still other embodiments, compounds of the invention are useful as inhibitors of CaV2.2.
  • the compounds and pharmaceutically acceptable compositions of the present invention can be employed in combination therapies, that is, the compounds and pharmaceutically acceptable compositions can be administered concurrently with, prior to, or subsequent to, one or more other desired therapeutics or medical procedures.
  • the particular combination of therapies (therapeutics or procedures) to employ in a combination regimen will take into account compatibility of the desired therapeutics and/or procedures and the desired therapeutic effect to be achieved.
  • the therapies employed may achieve a desired effect for the same disorder (for example, an inventive compound may be administered concurrently with another agent used to treat the same disorder), or they may achieve different effects (e.g., control of any adverse effects).
  • additional therapeutic agents that are normally administered to treat or prevent a particular disease, or condition are known as “appropriate for the disease, or condition, being treated”.
  • the amount of additional therapeutic agent present in the compositions of this invention will be no more than the amount that would normally be administered in a composition comprising that therapeutic agent as the only active agent.
  • the amount of additional therapeutic agent in the presently disclosed compositions will range from about 50% to 100% of the amount normally present in a composition comprising that agent as the only therapeutically active agent.
  • the present invention in another aspect, includes a composition for coating an implantable device comprising a compound of the present invention as described generally above, and in classes and subclasses herein, and a carrier suitable for coating said implantable device.
  • the present invention includes an implantable device coated with a composition comprising a compound of the present invention as described generally above, and in classes and subclasses herein, and a carrier suitable for coating said implantable device. Suitable coatings and the general preparation of coated implantable devices are described in U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • the coatings are typically biocompatible polymeric materials such as a hydrogel polymer, polymethyldisiloxane, polycaprolactone, polyethylene glycol, polylactic acid, ethylene vinyl acetate, and mixtures thereof.
  • the coatings may optionally be further covered by a suitable topcoat of fluorosilicone, polysaccarides, polyethylene glycol, phospholipids or combinations thereof to impart controlled release characteristics in the composition.
  • Another aspect of the invention relates to inhibiting NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2 activity in a biological sample or a patient, which method comprises administering to the patient, or contacting said biological sample with a compound of the present invention or a composition comprising said compound.
  • biological sample includes, without limitation, cell cultures or extracts thereof; biopsied material obtained from a mammal or extracts thereof; and blood, saliva, urine, feces, semen, tears, or other body fluids or extracts thereof.
  • Inhibition of NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2 activity in a biological sample is useful for a variety of purposes that are known to one of skill in the art. Examples of such purposes include, but are not limited to, the study of sodium ion channels in biological and pathological phenomena; and the comparative evaluation of new sodium ion channel inhibitors.
  • Compounds of the invention are useful as antagonists of voltage-gated sodium ion channels. Antagonist properties of test compounds were assessed as follows. Cells expressing the NaV of interest were placed into microtiter plates. After an incubation period, the cells were stained with fluorescent dyes sensitive to the transmembrane potential. The test compounds were added to the microtiter plate. The cells were stimulated with either a chemical or electrical means to evoke a NaV dependent membrane potential change from unblocked channels, which was detected and measured with trans-membrane potential-sensitive dyes. Antagonists were detected as a decreased membrane potential response to the stimulus.
  • the optical membrane potential assay utilized voltage-sensitive FRET sensors described by Gonzalez and Tsien (See, Gonzalez, J. E. and R. Y.
  • CHO cells endogenously expressing a NaV1.2 type voltage-gated NaV are seeded in 96-well poly-lysine coated plates at 60,000 cells per well.
  • Other subtypes are performed in an analogous mode in a cell line expressing the NaV of interest.
  • R ⁇ ( t ) ( intensity 460 ⁇ ⁇ n ⁇ ⁇ m - background 460 ⁇ ⁇ n ⁇ ⁇ m ) ( intensity 580 ⁇ ⁇ n ⁇ ⁇ m - background 580 ⁇ ⁇ n ⁇ ⁇ m )
  • the data is further reduced by calculating the initial (R i ) and final (R f ) ratios. These are the average ratio values during part or all of the pre-stimulation period, and during sample points during the stimulation period.
  • baseline is 2-7 sec and final response is sampled at 15-24 sec.
  • Control responses are obtained by performing assays in the presence of a compound with the desired properties (positive control), such as tetracaine, and in the absence of pharmacological agents (negative control). Responses to the negative (N) and positive (P) controls are calculated as above.
  • the compound antagonist activity A is defined as:
  • A R - P N - P ⁇ * 100.
  • CHO cells are grown in DMEM (Dulbecco's Modified Eagle Medium; GibcoBRL #10569-010) supplemented with 10% FBS (Fetal Bovine Serum, qualified; GibcoBRL #16140-071) and 1% Pen-Strep (Penicillin-Streptomycin; GibcoBRL #15140-122).
  • Cells are grown in vented cap flasks, in 90% humidity and 10% CO 2 , to 100% confluence. They are usually split by trypsinization 1:10 or 1:20, depending on scheduling needs, and grown for 2-3 days before the next split.
  • HEK293 cells stably expressing NaV1.3 are plated into 96-well microtiter plates. After an appropriate incubation period, the cells are stained with the voltage sensitive dyes CC2-DMPE/DiSBAC2(3) as follows.
  • 2 ⁇ CC2-DMPE 20 ⁇ M CC2-DMPE: 10 mM CC2-DMPE is vortexed with an equivalent volume of 10% pluronic, followed by vortexing in required amount of HBSS containing 10 mM HEPES. Each cell plate will require 5 mL of 2 ⁇ CC2-DMPE. 50 ⁇ L of 2 ⁇ CC2-DMPE is to wells containing washed cells, resulting in a 10 ⁇ M final staining concentration. The cells are stained for 30 minutes in the dark at RT.
  • the 2 ⁇ DiSBAC 2 (3) solution can be used to solvate compound plates. Note that compound plates are made at 2 ⁇ drug concentration. Wash stained plate again, leaving residual volume of 50 ⁇ L. Add 50 ⁇ L/well of the 2 ⁇ DiSBAC 2 (3) w/ABSC1. Stain for 30 minutes in the dark at RT.
  • the electrical stimulation instrument and methods of use are described in ION Channel Assay Methods PCT/US01/21652, herein incorporated by reference.
  • the instrument comprises a microtiter plate handler, an optical system for exciting the coumarin dye while simultaneously recording the coumarin and oxonol emissions, a waveform generator, a current- or voltage-controlled amplifier, and a device for inserting electrodes in well. Under integrated computer control, this instrument passes user-programmed electrical stimulus protocols to cells within the wells of the microtiter plate.
  • R ⁇ ( t ) ( intensity 460 ⁇ ⁇ n ⁇ ⁇ m - background 460 ⁇ ⁇ n ⁇ ⁇ m ) ( intensity 580 ⁇ ⁇ n ⁇ ⁇ m - background 580 ⁇ ⁇ n ⁇ ⁇ m )
  • the data is further reduced by calculating the initial (R i ) and final (R f ) ratios. These are the average ratio values during part or all of the pre-stimulation period, and during sample points during the stimulation period.
  • Control responses are obtained by performing assays in the presence of a compound with the desired properties (positive control), such as tetracaine, and in the absence of pharmacological agents (negative control). Responses to the negative (N) and positive (P) controls are calculated as above.
  • the compound antagonist activity A is defined as:
  • R is the ratio response of the test compound.
  • Patch clamp electrophysiology was used to assess the efficacy and selectivity of sodium channel blockers in dorsal root ganglion neurons.
  • Rat neurons were isolated from the dorsal root ganglions and maintained in culture for 2 to 10 days in the presence of NGF (50 ng/ml) (culture media consisted of NeurobasalA supplemented with B27, glutamine and antibiotics). Small diameter neurons (nociceptors, 8-12 ⁇ m in diameter) have been visually identified and probed with fine tip glass electrodes connected to an amplifier (Axon Instruments).
  • the “voltage clamp” mode has been used to assess the compound's IC50 holding the cells at ⁇ 60 mV.
  • the “current clamp” mode has been employed to test the efficacy of the compounds in blocking action potential generation in response to current injections. The results of these experiments have contributed to the definition of the efficacy profile of the compounds.
  • TTX-resistant sodium currents were recorded from DRG somata using the whole-cell variation of the patch clamp technique. Recordings were made at room temperature ( ⁇ 22° C.) with thick walled borosilicate glass electrodes (WPI; resistance 3-4 M ⁇ ) using an Axopatch 200B amplifier (Axon Instruments). After establishing the whole-cell configuration, approximately 15 minutes were allowed for the pipette solution to equilibrate within the cell before beginning recording. Currents were lowpass filtered between 2-5 kHz and digitally sampled at 10 kHz. Series resistance was compensated 60-70% and was monitored continuously throughout the experiment. The liquid junction potential ( ⁇ 7 mV) between the intracellular pipette solution and the external recording solution was not accounted for in the data analysis. Test solutions were applied to the cells with a gravity driven fast perfusion system (SF-77; Warner Instruments).
  • SF-77 gravity driven fast perfusion system
  • Dose-response relationships were determined in voltage clamp mode by repeatedly depolarizing the cell from the experiment specific holding potential to a test potential of +10 mV once every 60 seconds. Blocking effects were allowed to plateau before proceeding to the next test concentration.
  • Extracellular solution (in mM): NaCl (138), CaCl 2 (1.26), KCl (5.33), KH 2 PO 4 (0.44), MgCl 2 (0.5), MgSO 4 (0.41), NaHCO 3 (4), Na 2 HPO 4 (0.3), glucose (5.6), HEPES (10), CdCl2 (0.4), NiCl2 (0.1), TTX (0.25 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 3 ).
  • Compounds of the invention are useful as antagonists of voltage-gated calcium ion channels. Antagonist properties of test compounds were assessed as follows. Cells expressing the CaV of interest were placed into microtiter plates. After an incubation period, the cells were stained with fluorescent dyes sensitive to the transmembrane potential. The test compounds were added to the microtiter plate. The cells were stimulated with electrical means to evoke a CaV dependent membrane potential change from unblocked channels, which was detected and measured with trans-membrane potential-sensitive dyes. Antagonists were detected as a decreased membrane potential response to the stimulus.
  • the optical membrane potential assay utilized voltage-sensitive FRET sensors described by Gonzalez and Tsien (See, Gonzalez, J. E. and R. Y.
  • HEK293 cells stably expressing CaV2.2 are plated into 96-well microtiter plates. After an appropriate incubation period, the cells are stained with the voltage sensitive dyes CC2-DMPE/DiSBAC2(3) as follows.
  • 2 ⁇ CC2-DMPE 20 ⁇ M CC2-DMPE: 10 mM CC2-DMPE is vortexed with an equivalent volume of 10% pluronic, followed by vortexing in required amount of HBSS containing 10 mM HEPES. Each cell plate will require 5 mL of 2 ⁇ CC2-DMPE. 50 ⁇ L of 2 ⁇ CC2-DMPE is added to wells containing washed cells, resulting in a 10 ⁇ M final staining concentration. The cells are stained for 30 minutes in the dark at RT.
  • 2 ⁇ CC2DMPE & DISBAC 6 (3) 8 ⁇ M CC2DMPE & 2.
  • the electrical stimulation instrument and methods of use are described in ION Channel Assay Methods PCT/US01/21652, herein incorporated by reference.
  • the instrument comprises a microtiter plate handler, an optical system for exciting the coumarin dye while simultaneously recording the coumarin and oxonol emissions, a waveform generator, a current- or voltage-controlled amplifier, and a device for inserting electrodes in well. Under integrated computer control, this instrument passes user-programmed electrical stimulus protocols to cells within the wells of the microtiter plate.
  • R ⁇ ( t ) ( intensity 460 ⁇ ⁇ n ⁇ ⁇ m - background 460 ⁇ ⁇ n ⁇ ⁇ m ) ( intensity 580 ⁇ ⁇ n ⁇ ⁇ m - background 580 ⁇ ⁇ n ⁇ ⁇ m )
  • the data is further reduced by calculating the initial (R i ) and final (R f ) ratios. These are the average ratio values during part or all of the pre-stimulation period, and during sample points during the stimulation period.
  • Control responses are obtained by performing assays in the presence of a compound with the desired properties (positive control), such as mibefradil, and in the absence of pharmacological agents (negative control). Responses to the negative (N) and positive (P) controls are calculated as above.
  • the compound antagonist activity A is defined as:
  • R is the ratio response of the test compound.
  • HEK293 cells expressing CaV2.2 have been visually identified and probed with fine tip glass electrodes connected to an amplifier (Axon Instruments).
  • the “voltage clamp” mode has been used to assess the compound's IC50 holding the cells at ⁇ 100 mV. The results of these experiments have contributed to the definition of the efficacy profile of the compounds.
  • CaV2.2 calcium currents were recorded from HEK293 cells using the whole-cell variation of the patch clamp technique. Recordings were made at room temperature ( ⁇ 22° C.) with thick walled borosilicate glass electrodes (WPI; resistance 3-4 M ⁇ ) using an Axopatch 200B amplifier (Axon Instruments). After establishing the whole-cell configuration, approximately 15 minutes were allowed for the pipette solution to equilibrate within the cell before beginning recording. Currents were lowpass filtered between 2-5 kHz and digitally sampled at 10 kHz. Series resistance was compensated 60-70% and was monitored continuously throughout the experiment. The liquid junction potential ( ⁇ 7 mV) between the intracellular pipette solution and the external recording solution was not accounted for in the data analysis. Test solutions were applied to the cells with a gravity driven fast perfusion system (SF-77; Warner Instruments).
  • SF-77 gravity driven fast perfusion system
  • Dose-response relationships were determined in voltage clamp mode by repeatedly depolarizing the cell from the experiment specific holding potential to a test potential of +20 mV for 50 ms at frequencies of 0.1, 1, 5, 10, 15, and 20 Hz. Blocking effects were allowed to plateau before proceeding to the next test concentration.
  • Extracellular solution (in mM): NaCl (138), BaCl 2 (10), KCl (5.33), KH 2 PO 4 (0.44), MgCl 2 (0.5), MgSO 4 (0.41), NaHCO 3 (4), Na 2 HPO 4 (0.3), glucose (5.6), HEPES (10).

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Obesity (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)
  • Psychology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Reproductive Health (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to compounds useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated sodium channels. The invention also provides pharmaceutically acceptable compositions comprising the compounds of the invention and methods of using the compositions in the treatment of various disorders.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • The present application is a divisional of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/912,912 filed Aug. 5, 2004, which claims the benefit under 35 U.S.C. §119 to U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/493,036, filed Aug. 5, 2003, the entire disclosure of both applications being incorporated herein by reference.
  • TECHNICAL FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention relates to compounds useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated sodium channels and calcium channels. The invention also provides pharmaceutically acceptable compositions comprising the compounds of the invention and methods of using the compositions in the treatment of various disorders.
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Na channels are central to the generation of action potentials in all excitable cells such as neurons and myocytes. They play key roles in excitable tissue including brain, smooth muscles of the gastrointestinal tract, skeletal muscle, the peripheral nervous system, spinal cord and airway. As such they play key roles in a variety of disease states such as epilepsy (See, Moulard, B. and D. Bertrand (2002) “Epilepsy and sodium channel blockers” Expert Opin. Ther. Patents 12(1): 85-91)), pain (See, Waxman, S. G., S. Dib-Hajj, et al. (1999) “Sodium channels and pain” Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 96(14): 7635-9 and Waxman, S. G., T. R. Cummins, et al. (2000) “Voltage-gated sodium channels and the molecular pathogenesis of pain: a review” J Rehabil Res Dev 37(5): 517-28), myotonia (See, Meola, G. and V. Sansone (2000) “Therapy in myotonic disorders and in muscle channelopathies” Neurol Sci 21(5): S953-61 and Mankodi, A. and C. A. Thornton (2002) “Myotonic syndromes” Curr Opin Neurol 15(5): 545-52), ataxia (See, Meisler, M. H., J. A. Kearney, et al. (2002) “Mutations of voltage-gated sodium channels in movement disorders and epilepsy” Novartis Found Symp 241: 72-81), multiple sclerosis (See, Black, J. A., S. Dib-Hajj, et al. (2000) “Sensory neuron-specific sodium channel SNS is abnormally expressed in the brains of mice with experimental allergic encephalomyelitis and humans with multiple sclerosis” Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 97(21): 11598-602, and Renganathan, M., M. Gelderblom, et al. (2003) “Expression of Na(v)1.8 sodium channels perturbs the firing patterns of cerebellar purkinje cells” Brain Res 959(2): 235-42), irritable bowel (See, Su, X., R. E. Wachtel, et al. (1999) “Capsaicin sensitivity and voltage-gated sodium currents in colon sensory neurons from rat dorsal root ganglia” Am J Physiol 277(6 Pt 1): G1180-8, and Laird, J. M., V. Souslova, et al. (2002) “Deficits in visceral pain and referred hyperalgesia in Nav1.8 (SNS/PN3)-null mice” J Neurosci 22(19): 8352-6), urinary incontinence and visceral pain (See, Yoshimura, N., S. Seki, et al. (2001) “The involvement of the tetrodotoxin-resistant sodium channel Na(v)1.8 (PN3/SNS) in a rat model of visceral pain” J Neurosci 21(21): 8690-6), as well as an array of psychiatry dysfunctions such as anxiety and depression (See, Hurley, S. C. (2002) “Lamotrigine update and its use in mood disorders” Ann Pharmacother 36(5): 860-73).
  • Voltage gated Na channels comprise a gene family consisting of 9 different subtypes (NaV1.1-NaV1.9). As shown in Table 1, these subtypes show tissue specific localization and functional differences (See, Goldin, A. L. (2001) “Resurgence of sodium channel research” Annu Rev Physiol 63: 871-94). Three members of the gene family (NaV1.8, 1.9, 1.5) are resistant to block by the well-known Na channel blocker TTX, demonstrating subtype specificity within this gene family. Mutational analysis has identified glutamate 387 as a critical residue for TTX binding (See, Noda, M., H. Suzuki, et al. (1989) “A single point mutation confers tetrodotoxin and saxitoxin insensitivity on the sodium channel II” FEBS Lett 259(1): 213-6).
  • TABLE 1
    (Abbreviations: CNS = central nervous system,
    PNS = peripheral nervous sytem, DRG =
    dorsal root ganglion, TG = Trigeminal ganglion):
    Na
    Isoform Tissue TTX IC50 Indications
    NaV1.1 CNS, PNS 10 nM Pain, Epilepsy,
    soma of neurodegeneration
    neurons
    NaV1.2 CNS, high in 10 nM Neurodegeneration
    axons Epilepsy
    NaV1.3 CNS, 15 nM Pain, Epilepsy
    embryonic,
    injured nerves
    NaV1.4 Skeletal 25 nM Myotonia
    muscle
    NaV1.5 Heart  2 μM Arrythmia,
    long QT
    NaV1.6 CNS  6 nM Pain, movement
    widespread, disorders
    most abuntant
    NaV1.7 PNS, DRG, 25 nM Pain, Neuroendocrine
    terminals disorders
    neuroendocrine
    NaV1.8 PNS, small >50 μM  Pain
    neurons in
    DRG & TG
    NaV1.9 PNS, small  1 μM Pain
    neurons in
    DRG & TG
  • In general, voltage-gated sodium channels (NaVs) are responsible for initiating the rapid upstroke of action potentials in excitable tissue in nervous system, which transmit the electrical signals that compose and encode normal and aberrant pain sensations. Antagonists of NaV channels can attenuate these pain signals and are useful for treating a variety of pain conditions, including but not limited to acute, chronic, inflammatory, and neuropathic pain. Known NaV antagonists, such as TTX, lidocaine (See, Mao, J. and L. L. Chen (2000) “Systemic lidocaine for neuropathic pain relief” Pain 87(1): 7-17.) bupivacaine, phenyloin (See, Jensen, T. S. (2002) “Anticonvulsants in neuropathic pain: rationale and clinical evidence” Eur J Pain 6 (Suppl A): 61-8), lamotrigine (See, Rozen, T. D. (2001) “Antiepileptic drugs in the management of cluster headache and trigeminal neuralgia” Headache 41 Suppl 1: S25-32 and Jensen, T. S. (2002) “Anticonvulsants in neuropathic pain: rationale and clinical evidence” Eur J Pain 6 (Suppl A): 61-8), and carbamazepine (See, Backonja, M. M. (2002) “Use of anticonvulsants for treatment of neuropathic pain” Neurology 59(5 Suppl 2): S14-7), have been shown to be useful attenuating pain in humans and animal models.
  • Hyperalgesia (extreme sensitivity to something painful) that develops in the presence of tissue injury or inflammation reflects, at least in part, an increase in the excitability of high-threshold primary afferent neurons innervating the site of injury. Voltage sensitive sodium channels activation is critical for the generation and propagation of neuronal action potentials. There is a growing body of evidence indicating that modulation of NaV currents is an endogenous mechanism used to control neuronal excitability (See, Goldin, A. L. (2001) “Resurgence of sodium channel research” Annu Rev Physiol 63: 871-94.). Several kinetically and pharmacologically distinct voltage-gated sodium channels are found in dorsal root ganglion (DRG) neurons. The TTX-resistant current is insensitive to micromolar concentrations of tetrodotoxin, and displays slow activation and inactivation kinetics and a more depolarized activation threshold when compared to other voltage-gated sodium channels. TTX-resistant sodium currents are primarily restricted to a subpopulation of sensory neurons likely to be involved in nociception. Specifically, TTX-resistant sodium currents are expressed almost exclusively in neurons that have a small cell-body diameter; and give rise to small-diameter slow-conducting axons and that are responsive to capsaicin. A large body of experimental evidence demonstrates that TTX-resistant sodium channels are expressed on C-fibers and are important in the transmission of nociceptive information to the spinal cord.
  • Intrathecal administration of antisense oligo-deoxynucleotides targeting a unique region of the TTX-resistant sodium channel (NaV1.8) resulted in a significant reduction in PGE2-induced hyperalgesia (See, Khasar, S. G., M. S. Gold, et al. (1998) “A tetrodotoxin-resistant sodium current mediates inflammatory pain in the rat” Neurosci Lett 256(1): 17-20). More recently, a knockout mouse line was generated by Wood and colleagues, which lacks functional NaV1.8. The mutation has an analgesic effect in tests assessing the animal's response to the inflammatory agent carrageenan (See, Akopian, A. N., V. Souslova, et al. (1999) “The tetrodotoxin-resistant sodium channel SNS has a specialized function in pain pathways” Nat Neurosci 2(6): 541-8.). In addition, deficit in both mechano- and thermoreception were observed in these animals. The analgesia shown by the Nav1.8 knockout mutants is consistent with observations about the role of TTX-resistant currents in nociception.
  • Immunohistochemical, in-situ hybridization and in-vitro electrophysiology experiments have all shown that the sodium channel NaV1.8 is selectively localized to the small sensory neurons of the dorsal root ganglion and trigeminal ganglion (See, Akopian, A. N., L. Sivilotti, et al. (1996) “A tetrodotoxin-resistant voltage-gated sodium channel expressed by sensory neurons” Nature 379(6562): 257-62.). The primary role of these neurons is the detection and transmission of nociceptive stimuli. Antisense and immunohistochemical evidence also supports a role for NaV1.8 in neuropathic pain (See, Lai, J., M. S. Gold, et al. (2002) “Inhibition of neuropathic pain by decreased expression of the tetrodotoxin-resistant sodium channel, NaV1.8” Pain 95(1-2): 143-52, and Lai, J., J. C. Hunter, et al. (2000) “Blockade of neuropathic pain by antisense targeting of tetrodotoxin-resistant sodium channels in sensory neurons” Methods Enzymol 314: 201-13.). NaV1.8 protein is upregulated along uninjured C-fibers adjacent to the nerve injury. Antisense treatment prevents the redistribution of NaV1.8 along the nerve and reverses neuropathic pain. Taken together the gene-knockout and antisense data support a role for NaV1.8 in the detection and transmission of inflammatory and neuropathic pain.
  • In neuropathic pain states there is a remodeling of Na channel distribution and subtype. In the injured nerve, expression of NaV1.8 and NaV1.9 are greatly reduced whereas expression of the TTX sensitive subunit NaV1.3 is significantly upregulated in animal models of neuropathic pain (See, Dib-Hajj, S. D., J. Fjell, et al. (1999) “Plasticity of sodium channel expression in DRG neurons in the chronic constriction injury model of neuropathic pain.” Pain 83(3): 591-600 and Kim, C. H., Youngsuk, O., et al. (2001) “The changes in expression of three subtypes of TTX sensitive sodium channels in sensory neurons after spinal nerve ligation”. Mol. Brain. Res. 95:153-61.) The timecourse of the increase in NaV1.3 parallels the appearance of allodynia in animal models subsequent to nerve injury. Up-regulation of Nav1.3 transcription is also observed in a rat model of diabetic neuropathy. (See, Craner, M. J., Klein, J. P. et al. (2002) “Changes of sodium channel expression in experimental painful diabetic neuropathy.” Ann Neurol. 52(6): 786-92. The biophysics of the NaV1.3 channel is distinctive in that it shows very fast repriming after inactivation following an action potential. This allows for sustained rates of high firing as is often seen in the pathophysiological activity accompanying neuropathic pain (See, Cummins, T. R., F. Aglieco, et al. (2001) “Nav1.3 sodium channels: rapid repriming and slow closed-state inactivation display quantitative differences after expression in a mammalian cell line and in spinal sensory neurons” J Neurosci 21(16): 5952-61.). Human NaV1.3 channel proteins are expressed in the central and peripheral systems of man. (See, Chen, Y. H., Dale, T. J., et al. (2000) “Cloning, distribution and functional analysis of the type III sodium channel from human brain.” Eur. J. Neurosci. 12: 4281-89). Furthermore, in the periphery, NaV1.3 channel proteins are detectable in injured but not uninjured human nerves indicating that NaV1.3 plays important physiological roles under pathophysiological conditions in humans as well. Given the strong correlation between increased NaV1.3 channel expression and neuronal hyperexcitability, inhibitors of NaV1.3 channels, and in particular selective ones, might therefore provide efficacious therapeutic agents with less-severe side effects than nonselective Na_+ channel inhibitors in the treatment of painful neuropathies. Similarly, NaV1.3 overexpression may also be associated with increased epileptic neuronal activity as it is significantly upregulated in hippocampal pyramidal neurons of epileptic humans (See, Whitaker, W. R. J., Faull, M., et al. (2001) “Changes in the mRNAs encoding voltage-gated sodium channel types II and III in human epileptic hippocampus.” Neurosci. 106(2): 275-285.); inhibitors with some selectivity against Nav1.3 could also be particularly attractive anticonvulsants and neuroprotectants.
  • NaV1.9 is similar to NaV1.8 as it is selectively localized to small sensory neurons of the dorsal root ganglion and trigeminal ganglion (See, Fang, X., L. Djouhri, et al. (2002). “The presence and role of the tetrodotoxin-resistant sodium channel Na(v)1.9 (NaN) in nociceptive primary afferent neurons.” J Neurosci 22(17): 7425-33.). It has a slow rate of inactivation and left-shifted voltage dependence for activation (See, Dib-Hajj, S., J. A. Black, et al. (2002) “NaN/Nav1.9: sodium channel with unique properties” Trends Neurosci 25(5): 253-9.). These two biophysical properties allow NaV1.9 to play a role in establishing the resting membrane potential of nociceptive neurons. The resting membrane potential of NaV1.9 expressing cells is in the −55 to −50 mV range compared to −65 mV for most other peripheral and central neurons. This persistent depolarization is in large part due to the sustained low-level activation of NaV1.9 channels. This depolarization allows the neurons to more easily reach the threshold for firing action potentials in response to nociceptive stimuli. Compounds that block the NaV1.9 channel may play an important role in establishing the set point for detection of painful stimuli.
  • In chronic pain states, nerve and nerve ending can become swollen and hypersensitive exhibiting high frequency action potential firing with mild or even no stimulation. These pathologic nerve swellings are termed neuromas and the primary Na channels expressed in them are NaV1.8 and NaV1.7 (See, Kretschmer, T., L. T. Happel, et al. (2002) “Accumulation of PN1 and PN3 sodium channels in painful human neuroma-evidence from immunocytochemistry” Acta Neurochir (Wien) 144(8): 803-10; discussion 810.). NaV1.6 and NaV1.7 are also expressed in dorsal root ganglion neurons and contribute to the small TTX sensitive component seen in these cells. NaV1.7 in particular my therefore be a potential pain target in addition to it's role in neuroendocrine excitability (See, Klugbauer, N., L. Lacinova, et al. (1995) “Structure and functional expression of a new member of the tetrodotoxin-sensitive voltage-activated sodium channel family from human neuroendocrine cells” Embo J 14(6): 1084-90).
  • NaV1.1 (See, Sugawara, T., E. Mazaki-Miyazaki, et al. (2001) “Nav1.1 mutations cause febrile seizures associated with afebrile partial seizures.” Neurology 57(4): 703-5.) and NaV1.2 (See, Sugawara, T., Y. Tsurubuchi, et al. (2001) “A missense mutation of the Na+ channel alpha II subunit gene Na(v)1.2 in a patient with febrile and afebrile seizures causes channel dysfunction” Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 98(11): 6384-9) have been linked to epilepsy conditions including febrile seizures. There are over 9 genetic mutations in NaV1.1 associated with febrile seizures (See, Meisler, M. H., J. A. Kearney, et al. (2002) “Mutations of voltage-gated sodium channels in movement disorders and epilepsy” Novartis Found Symp 241: 72-81)
  • Antagonists for NaV1.5 have been developed and used to treat cardiac arrythmias. A gene defect in NaV1.5 that produces a larger noninactivating component to the current has been linked to long QT in man and the orally available local anesthetic mexilitine has been used to treat this condition (See, Wang, D. W., K. Yazawa, et al. (1997) “Pharmacological targeting of long QT mutant sodium channels.” J Clin Invest 99(7): 1714-20).
  • Several Na channel blockers are currently used or being tested in the clinic to treat epilepsy (See, Moulard, B. and D. Bertrand (2002) “Epilepsy and sodium channel blockers” Expert Opin. Ther. Patents 12(1): 85-91.); acute (See, Wiffen, P., S. Collins, et al. (2000) “Anticonvulsant drugs for acute and chronic pain” Cochrane Database Syst Rev 3), chronic (See, Wiffen, P., S. Collins, et al. (2000) “Anticonvulsant drugs for acute and chronic pain” Cochrane Database Syst Rev 3, and Guay, D. R. (2001) “Adjunctive agents in the management of chronic pain” Pharmacotherapy 21(9): 1070-81), inflammatory (See, Gold, M. S. (1999) “Tetrodotoxin-resistant Na+ currents and inflammatory hyperalgesia.” Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 96(14): 7645-9), and neuropathic pain (See, Strichartz, G. R., Z. Zhou, et al. (2002) “Therapeutic concentrations of local anaesthetics unveil the potential role of sodium channels in neuropathic pain” Novartis Found Symp 241: 189-201, and Sandner-Kiesling, A., G. Rumpold Seitlinger, et al. (2002) “Lamotrigine monotherapy for control of neuralgia after nerve section” Acta Anaesthesiol Scand 46(10): 1261-4); cardiac arrhythmias (See, An, R. H., R. Bangalore, et al. (1996) “Lidocaine block of LQT-3 mutant human Na+ channels” Circ Res 79(1): 103-8, and Wang, D. W., K. Yazawa, et al. (1997) “Pharmacological targeting of long QT mutant sodium channels” J Clin Invest 99(7): 1714-20); neuroprotection (See, Taylor, C. P. and L. S. Narasimhan (1997) “Sodium channels and therapy of central nervous system diseases” Adv Pharmacol 39: 47-98) and as anesthetics (See, Strichartz, G. R., Z. Zhou, et al. (2002) “Therapeutic concentrations of local anaesthetics unveil the potential role of sodium channels in neuropathic pain.” Novartis Found Symp 241: 189-201).
  • Voltage-gated calcium channels are membrane-spanning, multi-subunit proteins that open in response to membrane depolarization, allowing Ca entry from the extracellular milieu. Calcium channels were initially classified based on the time and voltage-dependence of channel opening and on the sensitivity to pharmacological block. The categories were low-voltage activated (primarily T-type) and high-voltage activated (L,N,P,Q or R-type). This classification scheme was replaced by a nomenclature based upon the molecular subunit composition, as summarized in Table I (Hockerman, G. H., et. al. (1997) Annu Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 37: 361-96; Striessnig, J. (1999) Cell. Physiol. Biochem. 9: 242-69). There are four primary subunit types that make up calcium channels—α1, α2, β and γ (See, e.g., De Waard et al. Structural and functional diversity of voltage-activated calcium channels. In Ion Channels, (ed. T. Narahashi) 41-87, (Plenum Press, New York, 1996)). The α1 subunit is the primary determinant of the pharmacological properties and contains the channel pore and voltage sensor (Hockerman, G. H., et. al. (1997) Annu Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 37: 361-96; Striessnig, J. (1999) Cell. Physiol. Biochem. 9: 242-69). Ten isoforms of the α1 subunit are known, as indicated in Table I. The α2δ subunit consists of two disulfide linked subunits, α2, which is primarily extracellular and a transmembrane δ subunit. Four isoforms of α2δ are known, α2δ-1, α2δ-2, α2δ-3 and α2δ-4. The β subunit is a non-glycosylated cytoplasmic protein that binds to the α1 subunit. Four isoforms are known, termed β1 to β4. The γ subunit is a transmembrane protein that has been biochemically isolated as a component of Cav 1 and Cav2 channels. At least 8 isoforms are known (γ1 to γ8) (Kang, M. G. and K. P. Campbell (2003) J. Biol. Chem. 278: 21315-8). The nomenclature for voltage-gated calcium channels is based upon the content of the α1 subunit, as indicated in Table I. Each type of α1 subunit can associate with a variety of β, α2δ or γ subunits, so that each Cav type corresponds to many different combinations of subunits.
  • Cav Nomenclature α1 subunit Pharmacological name
    Cav1.1 α1S L-type
    Cav1.2 α1C L-type
    Cav1.3 α1D L-type
    Cav1.4 α1F
    Cav2.1 α1A P- or Q-type
    Cav2.2 α1B N-type
    Cav2.3 α1E R-type
    Cav3.1 α1G T-type
    Cav3.2 α1H T-type
    Cav3.3 α1I T-type
  • Cav2 currents are found almost exclusively in the central and peripheral nervous system and in neuroendocrine cells and constitute the predominant forms of presynaptic voltage-gated calcium current. Presynaptic action potentials cause channel opening and neurotransmitter release is steeply dependent upon the subsequent calcium entry. Thus, Cav2 channels play a central role in mediating neurotransmitter release.
  • Cav2.1 and Cav2.2 contain high affinity binding sites for the peptide toxins co-conotoxin-MVIIC and co-conotoxin-GVIA, respectively, and these peptides have been used to determine the distribution and function of each channel type. Cav2.2 is highly expressed at the presynaptic nerve terminals of neurons from the dorsal root ganglion and neurons of lamina I and II of the dorsal horn (Westenbroek, R. E., et al. (1998) J. Neurosci. 18: 6319-30; Cizkova, D, et al. (2002) Exp. Brain Res. 147: 456-63). Cav2.2 channels are also found in presynaptic terminals between second and third order interneurons in the spinal cord. Both sites of neurotransmission are very important in relaying pain information to the brain.
  • Pain can be roughly divided into three different types: acute, inflammatory, and neuropathic. Acute pain serves an important protective function in keeping the organism safe from stimuli that may produce tissue damage. Severe thermal, mechanical, or chemical inputs have the potential to cause severe damage to the organism if unheeded. Acute pain serves to quickly remove the individual from the damaging environment. Acute pain by its very nature generally is short lasting and intense. Inflammatory pain, on the other hand, may last for much longer periods of time and its intensity is more graded. Inflammation may occur for many reasons including tissue damage, autoimmune response, and pathogen invasion. Inflammatory pain is mediated by a variety of agents that are released during inflammation, including substance P, histamines, acid, prostaglandin, bradykinin, CGRP, cytokines, ATP, and other agents (Julius, D. and A. I. Basbaum (2001) Nature 413 (6852): 203-10). The third class of pain is neuropathic and involves nerve damage arising from nerve injury or viral infection and results in reorganization of neuronal proteins and circuits yielding a pathologic “sensitized” state that can produce chronic pain lasting for years. This type of pain provides no adaptive benefit and is particularly difficult to treat with existing therapies.
  • Pain, particularly neuropathic and intractable pain is a large unmet medical need. Millions of individuals suffer from severe pain that is not well controlled by current therapeutics. The current drugs used to treat pain include NSAIDS, COX-2 inhibitors, opioids, tricyclic antidepressants, and anticonvulsants. Neuropathic pain has been particularly difficult to treat as it does not respond well to opioids until high doses are reached. Gabapentin is currently the most widely used therapeutic for the treatment of neuropathic pain, although it works in only 60% of patients and has modest efficacy. The drug is generally safe, although sedation is an issue at higher doses.
  • Validation of Cav2.2 as a target for the treatment of neuropathic pain is provided by studies with ziconotide (also known as ω-conotoxin-MVIIA), a selective peptide blocker of this channel (Bowersox, S. S., et al. (1996) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 279: 1243-9; Jain, K. K. (2000) Exp. Opin. Invest. Drugs 9: 2403-10; Vanegas, H. and H. Schaible (2000) Pain 85: 9-18). In man, intrathecal infusion of Ziconotide is effective for the treatment of intractable pain, cancer pain, opioid resistant pain, and neuropathic pain. The toxin has an 85% success rate for the treatment of pain in humans with a greater potency than morphine. An orally available antagonist of CaV2.2 should have similar efficacy without the need for intrathecal infusion. CaV2.1 and CaV2.3 are also in neurons of nociceptive pathways and antagonists of these channels could be used to treat pain.
  • Antagonists of CaV2.1, CaV2.2 or CaV2.3 should also be useful for treating other pathologies of the central nervous system that apparently involve excessive calcium entry. Cerebral ischaemia and stroke are associated with excessive calcium entry due to depolarization of neurons. The Cav2.2 antagonist ziconotide is effective in reducing infarct size in a focal ischemia model using laboratory animals, suggesting that CaV2.2 antagonists could be used for the treatment of stroke. Likewise, reducing excessive calcium influx into neurons may be useful for the treatment of epilepsy, traumatic brain injury, Alzheimer's disease, multi-infarct dementia and other classes of dementia, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, amnesia, or neuronal damage caused by poison or other toxic substances.
  • CaV2.2 also mediates release of neurotransmitters from neurons of the sympathetic nervous system and antagonists could be used to treat cardiovascular diseases such as hypertension, cardiac arrhythmia, angina pectoris, myocardial infarction, and congestive heart failure.
  • Unfortunately, as described above, the efficacy of currently used sodium channel blockers and calcium channel blockers for the disease states described above has been to a large extent limited by a number of side effects. These side effects include various CNS disturbances such as blurred vision, dizziness, nausea, and sedation as well more potentially life threatening cardiac arrhythmias and cardiac failure. Accordingly, there remains a need to develop additional Na channel antagonists, and Ca channel antagonists preferably those with higher potency and fewer side effects.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • It has now been found that compounds of this invention, and pharmaceutically acceptable compositions thereof, are useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated sodium channels. These compounds have the general formula I:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00001
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R1, R2, X1, X2, X3, X4, p, and Ring A are as defined below.
  • These compounds, and pharmaceutically acceptable compositions thereof, are useful for treating or lessening the severity of a variety of diseases, disorders, or conditions, including, but not limited to, acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain, arthritis, migrane, cluster headaches, trigeminal neuralgia, herpetic neuralgia, general neuralgias, epilepsy or epilepsy conditions, neurodegenerative disorders, psychiatric disorders such as anxiety and depression, myotonia, arrhythmia, movement disorders, neuroendocrine disorders, ataxia, multiple sclerosis, irritable bowel syndrome, and incontinence.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • I. General Description of Compounds of the Invention:
  • The present invention relates to compound of formula I useful as inhibitor of voltage-gated sodium channels:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00002
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
  • p is 0, 1 or 2;
  • X1, X2, X3 and X4 are each independently selected from NR3, C═O, CHR4, S, O, S═O, or SO2, as valency and stability permit;
  • R1 and R2 are each independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 aliphatic, a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, wherein R1, R2, or any ring formed by R1 and R2 taken together, are each independently optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-4 occurrences of —R5, and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R6;
  • Ring A is a 5-6 membered monocyclic or 8-10 membered bicyclic aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-5 occurrences of —R7, and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R8;
  • each occurrence of R4, R5, and R7 is independently Q-RX; wherein Q is a bond or is a C1-C6 alkylidene chain wherein up to two non-adjacent methylene units of Q are optionally and independently replaced by CO, CO2, COCO, CONR, OCONR, NRNR, NRNRCO, NRCO, NRCO2, NRCONR, SO, SO2, NRSO2, SO2NR, NRSO2NR, O, S, or NR;
  • each occurrence of Rx is independently selected from R′, halogen, NO2, or CN;
  • each occurrence of R is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic group;
  • each occurrence of R′ is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-8 aliphatic, C6-10 aryl, a heteroaryl ring having 5-10 ring atoms, or a heterocyclyl ring having 3-10 ring atoms, or wherein R and R′ taken together with the atom(s) to which they are bound, or two occurrences of R′ taken together with the atom(s) to which they are bound, form a 5-8 membered cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; and
  • each occurrence of R3, R6 or R8 is independently R′, —COR′, —CO2(C1-6 aliphatic), —CON(R′)2, or —SO2R′.
  • In certain embodiments, for compounds of the invention as described generally above and herein:
  • a) R1 is not hydrogen when R2 is optionally substituted indazol-3-yl;
  • b) R1 is not hydrogen when R2 is optionally substituted pyrazol-3-yl;
  • c) R1 is not hydrogen when R2 is 1,2,4-triazol-3-yl;
  • d) when p is 1, then:
      • i) when R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom, is N-morpholino, and Ring A is unsubstituted phenyl, then X1, X2, X3 and X4 are not, respectively:
        • 1) CH2, CH(CH2)Ph, NR3, and CHCH3;
        • 2) CH2, CH2, CH2, and S;
        • 3) CH2, S, CH2, and S;
        • 4) CH2, CH2, S, and CH2;
        • 5) CH2, CHMe, S, and CH2; or
        • 6) CHMe, CH2, N(CH2)Ph, and CH2;
      • ii) R1 is not hydrogen, and R2 is not CH2Ph, (CH2)2O(CH2)2OH, or —CH2(1,3-benzodioxol-5-yl) when ring A is imidazol-1-yl;
      • iii) when R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom, is N-piperidinyl then:
        • 1) when X1, X2 and X3 are CH2, and X4 is S, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl; and
        • 2) when X1, X2 and X4 are CH2; and X3 is S, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl;
      • iv) when R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom, is N-piperizinyl, X1, X2 and X3 are CH2, and X4 is S, then Ring A is not 3-NO2Ph, 4-pyridinyl, or unsubstituted phenyl;
      • v) when one of X1, X2, X3 or X4 is NR3 and the others of X1, X2, X3 or X4 are each CH2, and R1 and R2 are each Me, H, CH2Ph, or (CH2)2NMe2, then Ring A is not pyrid-2-yl substituted at the 6-position;
      • vi) when X1, X2, and X3 are each CH2, X4 is S, R1 is H, and R2 is —CH2—C≡CH, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl;
      • vii) when X1 is NMe; X2, X3 and X4 are each CH2, R1 is H, and R2 is unsubstituted phenyl, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl; and
      • viii) when X1, X2 and X4 are each CH2, X3 is S, R1 and R2 are each Me, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl; and
  • e) when p is 0, then:
      • i) when X1 is CH2, X2 is NR3, X3 is C═O; or X1 is C═O, X2 is CHR4, and X3 is NR3; or X2 is NR3, X2 is C═O, and X3 is CHR4; or X1 is CH2, X2 is O, and X3 is C═O, then when R1 is hydrogen and R2 is unsubstituted phenyl or —CH2CH2Cl, or when R1 and R2, taken together form optionally substituted piperazinyl, morpholino, piperidinyl, or pyrrolidinyl, then Ring A is not optionally substituted piperidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholino, or pyrrolidinyl;
      • ii) when X1 is CHR4, X2 is SO2, and X3 is CHR4, and R1 and R2, taken together are piperazinyl, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl;
      • iii) when X1 and X2 are CHR4, X3 is O, R1 is hydrogen, and R2 is —C(═O)CH3, then Ring A is not substituted furyl;
      • iv) when X1 is S, X2 is CHR4, X3 is CHR4; or X1 is CHR4, X2 is S, and X3 is CHR4; or X1 and X2 are CHR4 and X3 is S, then Ring A is not optionally substituted N-linked morpholino, pyrrolidinyl, piperazinyl, piperidinyl, or is not unsubstituted phenyl or cyclopropyl;
      • v) when X1 is CHR4, X2 is NR3, X3 is CHR4, and R1 and R2 are both methyl, then Ring A is not 6-methyl-2-pyridyl;
      • vi) when X1 is NR3, X2 is C═O, X2 is NR3, and R1 and R2 are both methyl, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl; and
      • vii) when X1 and X2 are CHR4, X3 is NR3, R1 is hydrogen, and R2 is unsubstituted phenyl, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl.
  • In certain other embodiments, for compounds of the invention as described generally above and herein:
      • a) when each of X1, X2, X3, and X4 is CHR4 and p is 0 or 1, then at least one R4 is other than hydrogen;
      • b) when each of X1, X2, X3, and X4 is CHR4 and Ring A is a substituted or unsubstituted piperizinyl group, then at least one R4 is other than hydrogen;
      • c) when each of X1, X2, X3, and X4 is CHR4, R1 is hydrogen, and R2 is 1H-indazol-3-yl, 7-fluoro-1H-indazol-3-yl, 5-fluoro-1H-indazol-3-yl, 5,7-difluoro-1H-indazol-3-yl or 5-methyl-1H-pyrazolyl, and Ring A is an unsubstituted phenyl group or is a phenyl group substituted in the ortho position with Cl or CF3, then at least one R4 is other than hydrogen; and
      • d) 5(6H)-quinazolinone, 4-anilino-7,8-dihydro-2,7-diphenyl- and 5(6H)-quinazolinone, 4-anilino-7,8-dihydro-7,7-dimethyl-2-phenyl- are excluded.
  • 2. Compounds and Definitions:
  • Compounds of this invention include those described generally above, and are further illustrated by the classes, subclasses, and species disclosed herein. As used herein, the following definitions shall apply unless otherwise indicated. For purposes of this invention, the chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 75th Ed. Additionally, general principles of organic chemistry are described in “Organic Chemistry”, Thomas Sorrell, University Science Books, Sausalito: 1999, and “March's Advanced Organic Chemistry”, 5th Ed., Ed.: Smith, M. B. and March, J., John Wiley & Sons, New York: 2001, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • As described herein, compounds of the invention may optionally be substituted with one or more substituents, such as are illustrated generally above, or as exemplified by particular classes, subclasses, and species of the invention. It will be appreciated that the phrase “optionally substituted” is used interchangeably with the phrase “substituted or unsubstituted.” In general, the term “substituted”, whether preceded by the term “optionally” or not, refers to the replacement of hydrogen radicals in a given structure with the radical of a specified substituent. Unless otherwise indicated, an optionally substituted group may have a substituent at each substitutable position of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure may be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at every position. Combinations of substituents envisioned by this invention are preferably those that result in the formation of stable or chemically feasible compounds. The term “stable”, as used herein, refers to compounds that are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allow for their production, detection, and preferably their recovery, purification, and use for one or more of the purposes disclosed herein. In some embodiments, a stable compound or chemically feasible compound is one that is not substantially altered when kept at a temperature of 40° C. or less, in the absence of moisture or other chemically reactive conditions, for at least a week.
  • The term “aliphatic” or “aliphatic group”, as used herein, means a straight-chain (i.e., unbranched) or branched, substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon chain that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, or a monocyclic hydrocarbon or bicyclic hydrocarbon that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic (also referred to herein as “carbocycle” “cycloaliphatic” or “cycloalkyl”), that has a single point of attachment to the rest of the molecule. Unless otherwise specified, aliphatic groups contain 1-20 aliphatic carbon atoms. In some embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-10 aliphatic carbon atoms. In other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-8 aliphatic carbon atoms. In still other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-6 aliphatic carbon atoms, and in yet other embodiments aliphatic groups contain 1-4 aliphatic carbon atoms. In some embodiments, “cycloaliphatic” (or “carbocycle” or “cycloalkyl”) refers to a monocyclic C3-C8 hydrocarbon or bicyclic C8-C12 hydrocarbon that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic, that has a single point of attachment to the rest of the molecule wherein any individual ring in said bicyclic ring system has 3-7 members. Suitable aliphatic groups include, but are not limited to, linear or branched, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl groups and hybrids thereof such as (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (cycloalkenyl)alkyl or (cycloalkyl)alkenyl.
  • The term “heteroaliphatic”, as used herein, means aliphatic groups wherein one or two carbon atoms are independently replaced by one or more of oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus, or silicon. Heteroaliphatic groups may be substituted or unsubstituted, branched or unbranched, cyclic or acyclic, and include “heterocycle”, “heterocyclyl”, “heterocycloaliphatic”, or “heterocyclic” groups.
  • The term “heterocycle”, “heterocyclyl”, “heterocycloaliphatic”, or “heterocyclic” as used herein means non-aromatic, monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic ring systems in which one or more ring members is an independently selected heteroatom. In some embodiments, the “heterocycle”, “heterocyclyl”, “heterocycloaliphatic”, or “heterocyclic” group has three to fourteen ring members in which one or more ring members is a heteroatom independently selected from oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, or phosphorus, and each ring in the system contains 3 to 7 ring members.
  • The term “heteroatom” means one or more of oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus, or silicon (including, any oxidized form of nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, or silicon; the quaternized form of any basic nitrogen or; a substitutable nitrogen of a heterocyclic ring, for example N (as in 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrrolyl), NH (as in pyrrolidinyl) or NR+ (as in N-substituted pyrrolidinyl)).
  • The term “unsaturated”, as used herein, means that a moiety has one or more units of unsaturation.
  • The term “alkoxy”, or “thioalkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl group, as previously defined, attached to the principal carbon chain through an oxygen (“alkoxy”) or sulfur (“thioalkyl”) atom.
  • The terms “haloalkyl”, “haloalkenyl” and “haloalkoxy” means alkyl, alkenyl or alkoxy, as the case may be, substituted with one or more halogen atoms. The term “halogen” means F, Cl, Br, or I.
  • The term “aryl” used alone or as part of a larger moiety as in “aralkyl”, “aralkoxy”, or “aryloxyalkyl”, refers to monocyclic, bicyclic, and tricyclic ring systems having a total of five to fourteen ring members, wherein at least one ring in the system is aromatic and wherein each ring in the system contains 3 to 7 ring members. The term “aryl” may be used interchangeably with the term “aryl ring”. The term “aryl” also refers to heteroaryl ring systems as defined hereinbelow.
  • The term “heteroaryl”, used alone or as part of a larger moiety as in “heteroaralkyl” or “heteroarylalkoxy”, refers to monocyclic, bicyclic, and tricyclic ring systems having a total of five to fourteen ring members, wherein at least one ring in the system is aromatic, at least one ring in the system contains one or more heteroatoms, and wherein each ring in the system contains 3 to 7 ring members. The term “heteroaryl” may be used interchangeably with the term “heteroaryl ring” or the term “heteroaromatic”.
  • An aryl (including aralkyl, aralkoxy, aryloxyalkyl and the like) or heteroaryl (including heteroaralkyl and heteroarylalkoxy and the like) group may contain one or more substituents. Suitable substituents on the unsaturated carbon atom of an aryl or heteroaryl group are selected from halogen; —R°; —OR°; —SR°; 1,2-methylene-dioxy; 1,2-ethylenedioxy; phenyl (Ph) optionally substituted with R°; —O(Ph) optionally substituted with R°; —(CH2)1-2(Ph), optionally substituted with R°; —CH═CH(Ph), optionally substituted with R°; —NO2; —CN; —N(R°)2; —NR°C(O)R°; —NR°C(O)N(R°)2; —NR°CO2R°; —NR°NR°C(O)R°; —NR°NR°C(O)N(R°)2; —NR°NR°CO2R°; —C(O)C(O)R°; —C(O)CH2C(O)R°; —CO2R°; —C(O)R°; —C(O)N(R°)2; —OC(O)N(R°)2; —S(O)2R°; —SO2N(R°)2; —S(O)R°; —NR°SO2N(R°)2; —NR°SO2R°; —C(═S)N(R°)2; —C(═NH)—N(R°)2; or —(CH2)0-2NHC(O)R° wherein each independent occurrence of R° is selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, an unsubstituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring, phenyl, —O(Ph), or —CH2(Ph), or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of R°, on the same substituent or different substituents, taken together with the atom(s) to which each R° group is bound, form a 3-8-membered cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Optional substituents on the aliphatic group of R° are selected from NH2, NH(C1-4aliphatic), N(C1-4aliphatic)2, halogen, C1-4aliphatic, OH, O(C1-4aliphatic), NO2, CN, CO2H, CO2(C1-4aliphatic), O(haloC1-4 aliphatic), or haloC1-4aliphatic, wherein each of the foregoing C1-4 aliphatic groups of R° is unsubstituted.
  • An aliphatic or heteroaliphatic group, or a non-aromatic heterocyclic ring may contain one or more substituents. Suitable substituents on the saturated carbon of an aliphatic or heteroaliphatic group, or of a non-aromatic heterocyclic ring are selected from those listed above for the unsaturated carbon of an aryl or heteroaryl group and additionally include the following: ═O, ═S, ═NNHR*, ═NN(R*)2, ═NNHC(O)R*, ═NNHCO2(alkyl), ═NNHSO2(alkyl), or ═NR*, where each R* is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic. Optional substituents on the aliphatic group of R* are selected from NH2, NH(C1-4 aliphatic), N(C1-4 aliphatic)2, halogen, C1-4 aliphatic, OH, O(C1-4 aliphatic), NO2, CN, CO2H, CO2(C1-4 aliphatic), O(halo C1-4 aliphatic), or halo(C1-4 aliphatic), wherein each of the foregoing C1-4 aliphatic groups of R* is unsubstituted.
  • Optional substituents on the nitrogen of a non-aromatic heterocyclic ring are selected from —R+, —N(R+)2, —C(O)R+, —CO2R+, —C(O)C(O)R+, —C(O)CH2C(O)R+, —SO2R+, —SO2N(R+)2, —C(═S)N(R+)2, —C(═NH)—N(R+)2, or —NR+SO2R+; wherein R+ is hydrogen, an optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted —O(Ph), optionally substituted —CH2(Ph), optionally substituted —(CH2)1-2(Ph); optionally substituted —CH═CH(Ph); or an unsubstituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring having one to four heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur, or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of R+, on the same substituent or different substituents, taken together with the atom(s) to which each R+ group is bound, form a 3-8-membered cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Optional substituents on the aliphatic group or the phenyl ring of R+ are selected from NH2, NH(C1-4 aliphatic), N(C1-4 aliphatic)2, halogen, C1-4 aliphatic, OH, O(C1-4 aliphatic), NO2, CN, CO2H, CO2(C1-4 aliphatic), O(halo C1-4 aliphatic), or halo(C1-4 aliphatic), wherein each of the foregoing C1-4 aliphatic groups of R+ is unsubstituted.
  • The term “alkylidene chain” refers to a straight or branched carbon chain that may be fully saturated or have one or more units of unsaturation and has two points of attachment to the rest of the molecule.
  • As detailed above, in some embodiments, two independent occurrences of R° (or R+, or any other variable similarly defined herein), are taken with the atom(s) to which each variable is bound to form a 3-8-membered cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Exemplary rings that are formed when two independent occurrences of R° (or R+, or any other variable similarly defined herein) are taken together with the atom(s) to which each variable is bound include, but are not limited to the following: a) two independent occurrences of R° (or R+, or any other variable similarly defined herein) that are bound to the same atom and are taken together with that atom to form a ring, for example, N(R°)2, where both occurrences of R° are taken together with the nitrogen atom to form a piperidin-1-yl, piperazin-1-yl, or morpholin-4-yl group; and b) two independent occurrences of R° (or R+, or any other variable similarly defined herein) that are bound to different atoms and are taken together with both of those atoms to form a ring, for example where a phenyl group is substituted with two occurrences of OR°
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00003
  • these two occurrences of R° are taken together with the oxygen atoms to which they are bound to form a fused 6-membered oxygen containing ring:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00004
  • It will be appreciated that a variety of other rings can be formed when two independent occurrences of R° (or R+, or any other variable similarly defined herein) are taken together with the atom(s) to which each variable is bound and that the examples detailed above are not intended to be limiting.
  • Unless otherwise stated, structures depicted herein are also meant to include all isomeric (e.g., enantiomeric, diastereomeric, and geometric (or conformational)) forms of the structure; for example, the R and S configurations for each asymmetric center, (Z) and (E) double bond isomers, and (Z) and (E) conformational isomers. Therefore, single stereochemical isomers as well as enantiomeric, diastereomeric, and geometric (or conformational) mixtures of the present compounds are within the scope of the invention. Unless otherwise stated, all tautomeric forms of the compounds of the invention are within the scope of the invention. Additionally, unless otherwise stated, structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds that differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms. For example, compounds having the present structures except for the replacement of hydrogen by deuterium or tritium, or the replacement of a carbon by a 13C- or 14C-enriched carbon are within the scope of this invention. Such compounds are useful, for example, as analytical tools or probes in biological assays.
  • 3. Description of Exemplary Compounds:
  • In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a compound wherein p is 0 or 1 In certain other embodiments, p is 0. Or, p is 1. Or, in certain embodiments, p is 2.
  • In other embodiments, the present invention provides a compound wherein Ring A is a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-5 occurrences of —R7, and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R8, wherein R7 and R8 are as defined above.
  • In one embodiment of formula I, X1, X2, and X4 are CH2, and X3 is CH-Me or N—(C1-4 alkyl), N-benzyl, p is 0, 1 or 2, R1 is methyl and R2 is furan-2-ylmethyl, dimethylaminoethyl, or methyl, or R1 and R2 taken together form piperidinyl, piperazinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, 4-C1-4 alkoxypiperidinyl, morpholinyl, 4-carboxy-C1-4alkylpiperazinyl, or 4-C1-4 alkylsulfonylpiperazinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-hydroxy-6-fluorophenyl, phenyl-2-disodium phosphate, or pyrrolyl.
  • In one embodiment of formula I, X1, X2, and X4 are CH2, and X3 is CH-Me or N-Me, p is 1, R1 is methyl and R2 is furan-2-ylmethyl or methyl, or R1 and R2 taken together form piperidinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl, or 4-C1-4 alkylsulfonylpiperazinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl or 2-hydroxy-6-fluorophenyl.
  • In one embodiment of formula I, X1, X2, and X4 are CH2, and X3 is CH-Me, p is 1, R1 is methyl and R2 is furan-2-ylmethyl or methyl, or R1 and R2 taken together form piperidinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, or 4-C1-4 alkylsulfonylpiperazinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl or 2-hydroxy-6-fluorophenyl.
  • In one embodiment of formula I, X1, X2, and X4 are CH2, and X3 is CH-Me, p is 1, R1 and R2 taken together form 4-methylpiperidinyl or 4-C1-4 alkylsulfonylpiperazinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxy or 2-hydroxy-6-fluorophenyl.
  • In one embodiment of formula I, X1, and X2 are CH2, X4 is CHOH or CH2, and X3 is CH2, CH-Me, or C(O)-Me, p is 1, R1 is methyl and R2 methyl or methylaminoethyl, or R1 and R2 taken together form 1-piperidinyl, 1-piperazinyl, or 4-methylpiperazinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, or 1-pyrrolyl.
  • In one embodiment of formula I, X1, X2, and X4 are CH2, and X3 is CH2 or CH-Me, p is 1, R1 is methyl and R2 methyl or methylaminoethyl, or R1 and R2 taken together form 1-piperazinyl or 4-methylpiperazinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl or 1-pyrrolyl.
  • In one embodiment of formula I, X1 and X4 are CH2, X2 is CH2, CHMe, or C(O)OMe, and X3 is N-benzyl, N-(3-methoxybenzyl), N-(4-carboxymethylbenzyl), CH2, or CH-Me, p is 1, R1 is methyl or benzyl and R2 is methyl or dimethylaminoethyl, or R1 and R2 taken together form a 1-piperazinyl, 1-piperidinyl, 4-carboxyethylpiperazinyl, 4-C1-4 alkylsulfonyl piperazinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, 4-methoxypiperidinyl, 4-methylpiperazinyl, 3-diethylaminocarbonylpiperidinyl, or morpholinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, or 1-pyrrolyl.
  • In one embodiment of formula I, X1, X2, and X4 are CH2, and X3 is N-benzyl, N-(3-methoxybenzyl), N-(4-carboxymethylbenzyl), CH2, or CH-Me, p is 1, R1 is methyl or benzyl and R2 is methyl or dimethylaminoethyl, or R1 and R2 taken together form a 1-piperazinyl, 1-piperidinyl, 4-carboxyethylpiperazinyl, 4-C1-4 alkylsulfonyl piperazinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, 4-methoxypiperidinyl, 3-diethylaminocarbonylpiperidinyl, or morpholinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, or 1-pyrrolyl.
  • In one embodiment of formula I, X1, X2, and X4 are CH2, and X3 is N-benzyl, N-(3-methoxybenzyl), N-(4-carboxymethylbenzyl), or CH-Me, p is 1, R1 is methyl or benzyl and R2 is methyl or dimethylaminoethyl, or R1 and R2 taken together form a 4-C1-4 alkylsulfonyl piperazinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, or 3-diethylaminocarbonylpiperidinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl or 2-methoxyphenyl.
  • In one embodiment of formula I, X1, X2, and X4 are CH2, and X3 is N-(3-methoxybenzyl) or CH-Me, p is 1, R1 and R2 are both methyl, or R1 and R2 taken together form a 4-methylsulfonylpiperazinyl or 4-ethylsulfonylpiperazinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl or 2-methoxyphenyl.
  • In one embodiment of formula I, X1, X2, and X4 are CH2, and X3 is CH2 or CH-Me, p is 1, R1 and R2 each are methyl or R1 and R2 taken together form 1-piperazinyl, and ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl or 1-pyrrolyl.
  • In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a compound of formula I′:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00005
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
  • R1 and R2 are each independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 aliphatic, a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, wherein R1, R2, or any ring formed by R1 and R2 taken together, are each independently optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-4 occurrences of —R5, and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R6;
  • Ring A is a 5-6 membered monocyclic or 8-10 membered bicyclic aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-5 occurrences of —R7, and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R8;
  • x is 0-6;
  • p is 0, 1, or 2; and
  • each occurrence of R4, R5, and R7 is independently Q-Rx; wherein Q is a bond or is a C1-C6 alkylidene chain wherein up to two non-adjacent methylene units of Q are optionally and independently replaced by CO, CO2, COCO, CONR, OCONR, NRNR, NRNRCO, NRCO, NRCO2, NRCONR, SO, SO2, NRSO2, SO2NR, NRSO2NR, O, S, or NR;
  • each occurrence of R is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic group;
  • each occurrence of R′ is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-8 aliphatic, C6-10 aryl, a heteroaryl ring having 5-10 ring atoms, or a heterocyclyl ring having 3-10 ring atoms, or wherein R and R′ taken together with the atom(s) to which they are bound, or two occurrences of R′ taken together with the atom(s) to which they are bound, form a 5-8 membered cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; and
  • each occurrence of R6 or R8 is independently R′, —COR′, —CO2(C1-6 aliphatic), —CON(R′)2, or —SO2R′.
  • In certain other embodiments, for compounds of formula I′ describe generally above and herein:
      • a) when p is 0 or 1, then at least one R4 is other than hydrogen;
      • b) when Ring A is a substituted or unsubstituted piperizinyl group, then at least one R4 is other than hydrogen;
      • c) when R1 is hydrogen and R2 is 1H-indazol-3-yl, 7-fluoro-1H-indazol-3-yl, 5-fluoro-1H-indazol-3-yl, 5,7-difluoro-1H-indazol-3-yl or 5-methyl-1H-pyrazolyl, and Ring A is an unsubstituted phenyl group or is a phenyl group substituted in the ortho position with Cl or CF3, then at least one R4 is other than hydrogen; and
      • d) 5(6H)-quinazolinone, 4-anilino-7,8-dihydro-2,7-diphenyl- and 5(6H)-quinazolinone, 4-anilino-7,8-dihydro-7,7-dimethyl-2-phenyl- are excluded.
  • As described generally above for compounds of formula I′, p is 0, 1, or 2, and thus compounds have the structure shown in formula I-A, I-B, or I-C:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00006
  • In certain preferred embodiments of formula I′, p is 1 and compounds have the structure as shown in I-B.
  • In one embodiment of formula I-B:
  • (i) ring A is pyrrolyl, pyridyl, fluorophenyl, hydroxyphenyl, acyloxyphenyl, hydroxy-fluorophenyl, methoxyphenyl, phenyl-phosphate disodium salt, methylpiperidyl, ethyl-carbamic acid phenyl ester;
  • (ii) x is 0-2, and R4 is C1-4 alkyl optionally substituted with hydroxy, C1-4 alkoxy, or halo, hydroxy, C1-4 alkylcarbonyloxy or carbo(C1-4alkoxy);
  • (iii) R1 is hydrogen, C1-4 alkyl, or benzyl, and R2 is C1-4 alkyl, di(C1-4 alkyl)amino-C1-4 alkyl, 2-(2′-tetrahydrofuranyl)methyl, 2-hydroxy-1-methyl-ethyl, or imidazol-5-yl-ethyl, or
  • (iii) R1 and R2 taken together form a ring selected from N-pyrrolidinyl, N-piperidinyl, N-piperazinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, (C1-4 alkyl)sulfonylpiperazinyl, wherein said ring is optionally substituted with up to 3 substituents selected from halo, oxo, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, —O— C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 alkyl optionally substituted with hydroxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, di(C1-4alkyl)aminocarbonyl, or carboxy.
  • In one embodiment of formula I-B:
  • (i) ring A is 1-pyrrolyl, 2-pyridyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-acyloxyphenyl, 2-hydroxy-6-fluorophenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, phenyl-2-phosphate disodium salt, or 4-methylpiperidyl, 2-ethyl-carbamic acid phenyl ester
  • (ii) x is 0, or x is 1 and R4 is 6-methyl, 7-methyl, 8-hydroxy, or 2-t-butylcarbonyloxy, or x is 2, and R4 is 6-carboxymethyl and 7-carboxymethyl;
  • (iii) R1 is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, or benzyl, and R2 is methyl, ethyl, dimethylaminoethyl, 2-(2′-tetrahydrofuranyl)methyl, 2-hydroxy-1-methyl-ethyl, methylaminoethyl, imidazol-5-yl-ethyl, or
  • (iii) R1 and R2 taken together form 4-methoxypiperidinyl, N-pyrrolidinyl, 3-trifluoromethyl-1-pyrrolidinyl, 4-butylsulfonyl-piperazinyl, 1-piperidinyl, 1-piperazinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, 4-hydroxypiperidinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 4-methylsulfonylpiperazinyl, 4-ethylsulfonylpiperazinyl, 4-isopropylsulfonylpiperazinyl, N-piperidinyl, 3-diethylaminocarbonyl-1-piperidinyl, 4-oxo-piperidinyl, 3-aminocarbonyl-piperidinyl, 4-methylpiperazinyl, or 4-carboxyethyl-piperazinyl.
  • In one embodiment of formula I-B, ring A is 2-pyridyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-acyloxyphenyl, 2-hydroxy-6-fluorophenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, or 4-methylpiperidyl, x is 0, or x is 1 and R4 is 6-methyl, 7-methyl, or 8-hydroxy, R1 is methyl, ethyl, or benzyl, and R2 is methyl, ethyl, dimethylaminoethyl, or 2-(2′-tetrahydrofuranyl)methyl, or R1 and R2 taken together form 4-methoxypiperidinyl, N-pyrrolidinyl, 4-butylsulfonyl-piperazinyl, piperidinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, 4-hydroxypiperidinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 4-methylsulfonylpiperazinyl, 4-ethylsulfonylpiperazinyl, 3-diethylaminocarbonyl-1-piperidinyl, or 4-carboxyethyl-piperazinyl
  • In one embodiment of formula I-B, ring A is 2-pyridyl, 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-acyloxyphenyl, 2-hydroxy-6-fluorophenyl, or 4-methylpiperidyl, x is 0, or x is 1 and R4 is 7-methyl, R1 is methyl and R2 is methyl or 2-(2′-tetrahydrofuranyl)methyl, or R1 and R2 taken together form 4-butylsulfonyl-piperazinyl, piperidinyl, 4-methylpiperidinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 4-methylsulfonylpiperazinyl, 4-ethylsulfonylpiperazinyl, 4-piperidinyl, or 4-carboxyethyl-piperazinyl.
  • In one embodiment of formula I-B, ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl, R1 and R2, taken together, form a 1-piperidinyl ring, x is 1, and R4 is 7-methyl.
  • In certain preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, neither R1 nor R2 is hydrogen, and R1 and R2 are each independently selected from a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, 0, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2. In more preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, both R1 and R2 are each independently an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2. In yet other preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, when R1 and R2 are each independently an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2, preferred R1 and R2 groups are each independently optionally substituted methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, n-propyl, propenyl, cyclobutyl, (CO)OCH2CH3, (CH2)2OCH3, CH2(CO)OCH2CH3, CH2(CO)OCH3, CH(CH3)CH2CH3, or t-butyl, or n-butyl. Most preferred R1 and R2 groups of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In other preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, one of R1 or R2 is hydrogen and the other of R1 or R2 is a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. In other embodiments, one of R1 or R2 is hydrogen, and the other of R1 or R2 is an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2.
  • For those embodiments described above and herein where R1 or R2 is a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or a 3-7 membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, preferred R1 and R2 groups are selected from:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00007
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00008
  • wherein each R5 and R6 are as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4. Most preferred rings include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In still other embodiments, for compounds of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen or oxygen. In certain preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, R1 and R2 are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound and form a 3-8 membered heterocyclyl group selected from:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00009
  • wherein each R5 and R6 are as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4.
  • In other preferred embodiments, for compounds of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, R1 and R2 taken together are optionally substituted pyrrolidin-1-yl (ff), piperidin1-yl (dd), piperazin-1-yl (cc), or morpholin-4-yl (ee).
  • In preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, z is 0-2. In other preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, z is 0 and the ring is unsubstituted.
  • Preferred R5 groups of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, when present, are independently halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, OR′, —CH2OR′, SR′, —CH2SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, or —S(O)2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, R5 groups are each independently Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy. Most preferred R5 groups include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, R6 groups are independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, —CH2OR′, —CH2SR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, or —S(O)2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, R6 groups are each independently H, Me, CF3, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C1-C4alkyl), —CONH2, —COO(C1-C4alkyl), —CH2OH, —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, or optionally substituted phenyl. Most preferred R6 groups of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, x is 0, 1, or 2 and each R4 is independently hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, OR′, —CH2OR′, SR′, —CH2SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, or —S(O)2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, each R4 is independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy. In still other preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, two occurrences of R4, taken together form an optionally substituted 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. In some preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, two occurrences of R4, taken together form a cycloalkyl group and compounds have the structure as shown in formula I-B-i:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00010
  • Other preferred R4 groups of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In certain embodiments, for compounds of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, Ring A is a phenyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrrolyl, piperidinyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzotriazolyl, pyrazolyl, benzopyrazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, thiazolyl, benzthizolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, triazolyl, benzotriazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, furanoyl, benzofuranoyl, or triazinyl ring, each optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-5 occurrences of —R7, and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R8. It will be appreciated that Ring A can be attached to the pyrimidinyl ring through any available carbon or nitrogen atom (e.g., a thiazole ring can be attached in the 2-, 4-, or 5-position). In certain preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, Ring A is optionally substituted phenyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, or 4-pyridyl:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00011
  • wherein each y is independently 0-5 and R7 is as defined generally above and herein.
  • In preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, y is 0-2. In other preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, y is 0 and Ring A is unsubstituted. In preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, R7 groups are independently hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, OR′, —CH2OR′, SR′, —CH2SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, or —S(O)2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, R7 groups are each independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy. Most preferred R7 groups of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, R8 groups are independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, —CH2OR′, —CH2SR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, or —S(O)2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C, R8 groups are each independently H, Me, CF3, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CONH2, —COO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CH2OH, —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, or optionally substituted phenyl. Most preferred R8 groups of any of formulae I′, I-A, I-B, and I-C include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In another embodiment, Ring A is optionally substituted phenyl and compounds of formula II are provided:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00012
  • wherein R1, R2, R4, R7, p, and y are as defined generally and in subsets above and herein.
  • In certain other preferred embodiments, for compounds of formula I-A, I-B, or I-C, Ring A is phenyl and compounds have the structure shown in formula II-A, II-B, or II-C.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00013
  • In certain preferred embodiments for compounds of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, neither R1 nor R2 is hydrogen, and R1 and R2 are each independently selected from a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S; a 3-7 membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2. In more preferred embodiments of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, both R1 and R2 are an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2. In yet other preferred embodiments of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, when R1 and R2 are an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2, preferred R1 and R2 groups are optionally substituted methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, n-propyl, propenyl, cyclobutyl, (CO)OCH2CH3, (CH2)2OCH3, CH2(CO)OCH2CH3, CH2(CO)OCH3, CH(CH3)CH2CH3, or t-butyl, or n-butyl. Most preferred R1 and R2 groups of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In other preferred embodiments of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, one of R1 or R2 is hydrogen and the other of R1 or R2 is a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. In other embodiments of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, one of R1 or R2 is hydrogen, and the other of R1 or R2 is an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2.
  • For those embodiments described above and herein where R1 or R2 is a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or a 3-7 membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, preferred R1 and R2 groups are selected from:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00014
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00015
  • wherein each R5 and R6 are as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4. Most preferred rings include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In still other embodiments, for compounds of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen or oxygen. In certain preferred embodiments of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, R1 and R2 are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound and form a 3-8 membered heterocyclyl group selected from:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00016
  • wherein each of R5 and R6 are as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4.
  • In other preferred embodiments, for compounds of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, R1 and R2 taken together are optionally substituted pyrrolidin-1-yl (ff), piperidin1-yl (dd), piperazin-1-yl (cc), or morpholin-4-yl (ee).
  • In preferred embodiments of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, z is 0-2. In other preferred embodiments of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, z is 0 and the ring is unsubstituted.
  • Preferred R5 groups of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, when present, are independently halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, OR′, —CH2OR′, SR′, —CH2SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, or —S(O)2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, R5 groups are each independently Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy. Most preferred R5 groups of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In preferred embodiments of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, R6 groups are independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6) alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, —CH2OR′, —CH2SR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, or —S(O)2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, R6 groups are each independently H, Me, CF3, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CONH2, —COO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CH2OH, —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, or optionally substituted phenyl. Most preferred R6 groups of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In preferred embodiments of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, x is 0, 1, or 2 and each R4 is independently hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, OR′, —CH2OR′, SR′, —CH2SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, or —S(O)2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, each R3 is independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy. In still other preferred embodiments of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, two occurrences of R4, taken together form an optionally substituted 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. In some preferred embodiments of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C, two occurrences of R4, taken together form a cycloalkyl group and compounds have the structure as shown in formula II-B-i:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00017
  • Other preferred R4 groups of any of formulae II, II-A, II-B, or II-C include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In preferred embodiments, y is 0-2. In other preferred embodiments, y is 0 and Ring A is unsubstituted. In preferred embodiments, R7 groups are independently hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, OR′, —CH2OR′, SR′, —CH2SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, or —S(O)2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments, R7 groups are each independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy. Most preferred R7 groups include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In yet other preferred embodiments y is 1 and compounds have the general formula III:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00018
  • wherein R1, R2, R4, x, and p are described generally above and herein, and R7 is halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, —OR′, —CH2OR′, —SR′, —CH2SR′, —COOR′, —NRCOR′, —CON(R′)2, or —S(O)2N(R′)2.
  • In other preferred embodiments p is 0, 1, or 2, and compounds have the structure of formula III-A, III-B, or III-C:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00019
  • wherein R1, R2, R4, and x are described generally above and herein, and each R7 is independently halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, —OR′, —CH2OR′, —SR′, —CH2SR′, —COOR′, —NRCOR′, —CON(R′)2, or —S(O)2N(R′)2.
  • In one embodiment of formula III-A, x is 0, R7 is hydroxy, R1 and R2 are both C1-4 alkyl, or R1 and R2, taken together, form a pyrrolidyl, piperidinyl, or morpholinyl ring. In another embodiment of formula IIIA, x is 0, R7 is hydroxy, R1 and R2 are both methyl, or R1 and R2, taken together, form a pyrrolidyl or piperidinyl ring. Or, in another embodiment, x is 0, R7 is hydroxy, R1 and R2 are both methyl, or R1 and R2, taken together, form a pyrrolidyl ring.
  • In one embodiment of formula III-B,
  • In still other preferred embodiments compounds of the invention are defined according to formula III, III-A, III-B, or III-C and one or more of, or all of, R1, R2, R4 or x are further defined according to one or more of, or all of, the following groups:
      • a. R1 and R2 are each independently selected from a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2; and
      • b. x is 0, 1, or 2, and R4 is hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, OR′, —CH2OR′, SR′, —CH2SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, or —S(O)2N(R′)2.
  • In still other preferred embodiments compounds of the invention are defined according to formula III, III-A, III-B, or III-C and one or more of, or all of, R1, R2, R4, x, or R7 are further defined according to one or more of, or all of, the following groups:
      • a. R1 and R2 are each independently optionally substituted methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, n-propyl, propenyl, cyclobutyl, (CO)OCH2CH3, (CH2)2OCH3, CH2(CO)OCH2CH3, CH2(CO)OCH3, CH(CH3)CH2CH3, or t-butyl, or n-butyl; and
      • b. x is 0, 1, or 2, and each R4 is independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy.
  • In still other preferred embodiments compounds of the invention are defined according to formula III, III-A, III-B, or III-C and one or more of, or all of, R1, R2, R4, x, or R7 are further defined according to one or more of, or all of, the following groups:
      • a. R1 and R2 are each independently optionally substituted methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, n-propyl, propenyl, cyclobutyl, (CO)OCH2CH3, (CH2)2OCH3, CH2(CO)OCH2CH3, CH2(CO)OCH3, CH(CH3)CH2CH3, or t-butyl, or n-butyl;
      • b. x is 0, 1, or 2, and each R4 is independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy; and
      • c. R7 is Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy.
  • In one embodiment, formula III-C has one or more of the following features:
      • (i) R7 is hydroxy;
      • (ii) R1 and R2 are both C1-4 alkyl, preferably, methyl, or R1 and R2, taken together, form a pyrrolinyl ring or morpholinyl ring; and
      • (iii) x is 0.
  • In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a compound of formula IV:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00020
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
  • p is 0, 1 or 2;
  • X1, X2, X3 and X4 are each independently selected from NR3, CO═O, CHR4, S, O, S═O, or SO2, as valency and stability permit, provided that that X1, X2, X3 and X4 are not each simultaneously CHR4;
  • R1 and R2 are each independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 aliphatic, a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, wherein R1, R2, or any ring formed by R1 and R2 taken together, are each independently optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-4 occurrences of —R5, and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R6;
  • Ring A is a 5-6 membered monocyclic or 8-10 membered bicyclic aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-5 occurrences of —R7, and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R8;
  • each occurrence of R4, R5, and R7 is independently Q-RX; wherein Q is a bond or is a C1-6 alkylidene chain wherein up to two non-adjacent methylene units of Q are optionally and independently replaced by CO, CO2, COCO, CONR, OCONR, NRNR, NRNRCO, NRCO, NRCO2, NRCONR, SO, SO2, NRSO2, SO2NR, NRSO2NR, O, S, or NR;
  • each occurrence of Rx is independently selected from R′, halogen, NO2, or CN;
      • each occurrence of R is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic group;
  • each occurrence of R′ is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-8 aliphatic, C6-10 aryl, a heteroaryl ring having 5-10 ring atoms, or a heterocyclyl ring having 3-10 ring atoms, or wherein R and R′ taken together with the atom(s) to which they are bound, or two occurrences of R′ taken together with the atom(s) to which they are bound, form a 5-8 membered cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; and
  • each occurrence of R3, R6 or R8 is independently R′, —COR′, —CO2(C1-6 aliphatic), —CON(R′)2, or —SO2R′.
  • In certain embodiments, for compounds of formula IV:
  • a) R1 is not hydrogen when R2 is optionally substituted indazol-3-yl;
  • b) R1 is not hydrogen when R2 is optionally substituted pyrazol-3-yl;
  • c) R1 is not hydrogen when R2 is 1,2,4-triazol-3-yl;
  • d) when p is 1, then:
      • i) when R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom, is N-morpholino, and Ring A is unsubstituted phenyl, then X1, X2, X3 and X4 are not, respectively:
        • 1) CH2, CH(CH2)Ph, NR3, and CHCH3;
        • 2) CH2, CH2, CH2, and S;
        • 3) CH2, S, CH2, and S;
        • 4) CH2, CH2, S, and CH2;
        • 5) CH2, CHMe, S, and CH2; or
        • 6) CHMe, CH2, N(CH2)Ph, and CH2;
      • ii) R1 is not hydrogen, and R2 is not CH2Ph, (CH2)2—O—(CH2)2OH, or —CH2(1,3-benzodioxol-5-yl) when Ring A is imidazol-1-yl;
      • iii) when R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom, is N-piperidinyl then:
        • 1) when X1, X2 and X3 are CH2, and X4 is S, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl; and
      • 2) when X1, X2 and X4 are CH2; and X3 is S, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl;
      • iv) when R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom, is N-piperizinyl, X1, X2 and X3 are CH2; and X4 is S, then Ring A is not 3-NO2Ph, 4-pyridinyl, or unsubstituted phenyl;
      • v) when one of X1, X2, X3 or X4 is NR3 and the others of X1, X2, X3 or X4 are each CH2, and R1 and R2 are each Me, H, CH2Ph, or (CH2)2NMe2, then Ring A is not pyrid-2-yl substituted at the 6-position;
      • vi) when X1, X2, and X3 are each CH2, X4 is S, R1 is H, and R2 is —CH2—C≡CH, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl;
      • vii) when X1 is NMe; X2, X3 and X4 are each CH2, R1 is H, and R2 is unsubstituted phenyl, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl; and
      • viii) when X1, X2 and X4 are each CH2; X3 is S, R1 and R2 are each Me, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl; and
      • e) when p is 0, then:
        • i) when X1 is CH2, X2 is NR3, X3 is C═O; or X1 is C═O, X2 is CHR4, and X3 is NR3; or X2 is NR3, X2 is C═O, and X3 is CHR4; or X1 is CH2, X2 is O, and X3 is C═O, then when R1 is hydrogen and R2 is unsubstituted phenyl or —CH2CH2Cl, or when R1 and R2, taken together form optionally substituted piperazinyl, morpholino, piperidinyl, or pyrrolidinyl, then Ring A is not optionally substituted piperidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholino, or pyrrolidinyl;
      • ii) when X1 is CHR4, X2 is SO2, and X3 is CHR4, and R1 and R2, taken together are piperazinyl, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl;
      • iii) when X1 and X2 are CHR4, X3 is O, R1 is hydrogen, and R2 is —C(═O)CH3, then Ring A is not substituted furyl;
      • iv) when X1 is S, X2 is CHR4, X3 is CHR4; or X1 is CHR4, X2 is S, and X3 is CHR4; or X1 and X2 are CHR4 and X3 is S, then Ring A is not optionally substituted N-linked morpholino, pyrrolidinyl, piperazinyl, piperidinyl, or is not unsubstituted phenyl or cyclopropyl;
      • v) when X1 is CHR4, X2 is NR3, X3 is CHR4, and R1 and R2 are both methyl, then Ring A is not 6-methyl-2-pyridyl;
      • vi) when X1 is NR3, X2 is C═O, X2 is NR3, and R1 and R2 are both methyl, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl; and
      • vii) when X1 and X2 are CHR4, X3 is NR3, R1 is hydrogen, and R2 is unsubstituted phenyl, then Ring A is not unsubstituted phenyl.
  • As described generally above, for compounds of formula IV, p is 0, 1, or 2, and X1, X2, X3 and X4 are each independently selected from NR3, CHR4, S, O, S═O, or SO2, as valency and stability permit, provided that when p is 1, X1, X2, X3 and X4 are not each simultaneously CHR4, or when p is 0, X1, X2, and X3 are not each simultaneously CHR4.
  • In certain embodiments, p is 0 or 1.
  • In certain preferred embodiments of formula IV, one or two of X1, X2, X3, or X4 is NR3, S, O, S═O, or SO2, and the remaining one, two, or three are each CHR4. In more preferred embodiments of formula IV, one of X1, X2, X3, or X4 is NR3, S, or O, and the remaining two (when p is 0) or three (when p is 1) are each CHR4, and compounds have one of the following structures:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00021
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00022
  • wherein each R1, R2, Ring A, X1, X2, X3 and X4 is as defined above and herein.
  • In one embodiment of formula IV-I, formula IV-J, formula IV-K, formula IV-L, or formula IV-M, the sulfur ring atom is replaced with sulfoxy. Or, the sulfur ring atom is replaced with sulfonyl.
  • In certain preferred embodiments of formula IV, neither R1 nor R2 is hydrogen, and R1 and R2 are each independently selected from a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2. In more preferred embodiments of formula IV, both R1 and R2 are an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2. In yet other preferred embodiments of formula IV, when R1 and R2 are an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2, preferred R1 and R2 groups are optionally substituted methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, n-propyl, propenyl, cyclobutyl, (CO)OCH2CH3, (CH2)2OCH3, CH2(CO)OCH2CH3, CH2(CO)OCH3, CH(CH3)CH2CH3, or t-butyl, or n-butyl. Most preferred R1 and R2 groups of formula IV include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In other preferred embodiments of formula IV, one of R1 or R2 is hydrogen and the other of R1 or R2 is a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. In other embodiments of formula IV, one of R1 or R2 is hydrogen, and the other of R1 or R2 is an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2.
  • For those embodiments described above and herein for compounds of formula IV where R1 or R2 is a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, preferred R1 and R2 groups are selected from:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00023
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00024
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00025
  • wherein each R5 and R6 is as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4. Most preferred rings include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In still other embodiments for compounds of formula IV, R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen or oxygen. In certain preferred embodiments, R1 and R2 are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound and form a 3-8 membered heterocyclyl group selected from:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00026
  • wherein each R5 and R6 is as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4.
  • In other preferred embodiments of formula IV, R1 and R2 taken together are optionally substituted pyrrolidin-1-yl (ff), piperidin1-yl (dd), piperazin-1-yl (cc), or morpholin-4-yl (ee).
  • In preferred embodiments of formula IV, z is 0-2. In other preferred embodiments of formula IV, z is 0 and the ring is unsubstituted.
  • Preferred R5 groups of formula IV, when present, are independently halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, OR′, —CH2OR′, SR′, —CH2SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, SO2R′, or —SO2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of formula IV, R5 groups are each independently Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —SO2NH2, —SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy. Most preferred R5 groups of formula IV include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In preferred embodiments of formula IV, R6 groups are independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, —CH2OR′, —CH2SR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, SO2R′, or —S(O)2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of formula IV, R6 groups are each independently H, Me, CF3, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CONH2, —COO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CH2OH, —SO2(C1-C4alkyl), —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, or optionally substituted phenyl or benzyl. Most preferred R6 groups of formula IV include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In preferred embodiments of formula IV, R4 groups are independently hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, OR′, —CH2OR′, SR′, —CH2SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, SO2R′, or —SO2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of formula IV, R4 groups are each independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CO(C1-C4alkyl), —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2(C1-C4alkyl), —SO2NH2, —SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy. Most preferred R4 groups of formula IV include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In preferred embodiments of formula IV, R3 groups are independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, —CH2OR′, —CH2SR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, SO2R′, or —S(O)2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of formula IV, R3 groups are each independently H, Me, CF3, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C1-C4alkyl), —CONH2, —COO(C1-C4alkyl), —CH2OH, —SO2(C1-C4alkyl), —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, or optionally substituted phenyl or benzyl. Most preferred R3 groups of formula IV include those shown below in Table 2.
  • As described generally above of formula IV, Ring A is a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-5 occurrences of —R7, and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R8. In certain embodiments, for compounds of formula IV or compounds of formulae IV-A through IV-N, Ring A is a phenyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrrolyl, piperidinyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzotriazolyl, pyrazolyl, benzopyrazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, thiazolyl, benzthizolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, isoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, triazolyl, benzotriazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, furanoyl, benzofuranoyl, or triazinyl ring, each optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-5 occurrences of —R7, and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R8. It will be appreciated that Ring A can be attached to the pyrimidinyl ring through any available carbon or nitrogen atom (e.g., a thiazole ring can be attached in the 2-, 4-, or 5-position). In certain preferred embodiments of formula IV, Ring A is optionally substituted phenyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, or 4-pyridyl:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00027
  • wherein each y is independently 0-5 and each R7 is as defined generally above.
  • In preferred embodiments of formula IV, y is 0-2. In other preferred embodiments of formula IV, y is 0 and Ring A is unsubstituted.
  • In preferred embodiments of formula IV, R7 groups are independently hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, OR′, —CH2OR′, SR′, —CH2SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, SO2R′, or —SO2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of formula IV, R7 groups are each independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CO(C1-C4alkyl), —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2(C1-C4alkyl), —SO2NH2, —SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy. Most preferred R7 groups of formula IV include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In preferred embodiments of formula IV, R8 groups are independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, —CH2OR′, —CH2SR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, SO2R′, or —S(O)2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of formula IV, R8 groups are each independently H, Me, CF3, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C1-C4alkyl), —CONH2, —COO(C1-C4alkyl), —CH2OH, —SO2(C1-C4alkyl), —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, or optionally substituted phenyl or benzyl. Most preferred R8 groups of formula IV include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In one embodiment of formula IV-A, R1 hydrogen or methyl, and R2 is methyl, 5-methyl-pyrazol-3-yl, 5-fluoro-benzopyrazol-3-yl, or benzopyrazol-3-yl, X1, X3, and X4 each is CH2, R3 is hydrogen, acyl, 1-oxo-2-methoxy-ethyl, 1-oxo-propyl, methylsulfonyl, ethylsulfonyl, benzyl, and ring A is phenyl optionally substituted with halo, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, C1-4 alkyl, or C1-4 alkoxy, preferably, methoxy, or ring A is 2,3-Dihydro-benzo[1,4]dioxin-3-yl.
  • In one embodiment of formula IV-A, R1 hydrogen or methyl, and R2 is methyl, 5-methyl-pyrazol-3-yl, 5-fluoro-benzopyrazol-3-yl, or benzopyrazol-3-yl, X1, X3, and X4 each is CH2, R3 is hydrogen or benzyl, and ring A is phenyl optionally substituted with halo, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, C1-4 alkyl, or C1-4 alkoxy, preferably, methoxy, or ring A is 2,3-Dihydro-benzo[1,4]dioxin-3-yl.
  • In one embodiment of formula IV-A, R1 hydrogen or methyl, and R2 is methyl, 5-methyl-pyrazol-3-yl, 5-fluoro-benzopyrazol-3-yl, or benzopyrazol-3-yl, X1, X3, and X4 each is CH2, R3 is hydrogen or benzyl, and ring A is phenyl optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy or C1-4 alkoxy, preferably, methoxy.
  • In one embodiment of formula IV-B, R1 is hydrogen or methyl, R2 is methyl or 5-fluorobenzimidazol-3-yl, 5-methylimidazol-3-yl, X1, X3, and X4 each is CH2, R3 is hydrogen, C1-4 alkyl, benzyl optionally substituted with carboxy-C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 alkylsulfonyl, acyl, methylcarboxyethyl, C1-4 alkylcarbonyl, methoxymethylcarbonyl, or benzoyl, and ring A is phenyl substituted with 2-hydroxy, 2-trifluoromethyl, 4-methyl, 4-carboxylic acid, 4-trifluoromethyloxy, or 2-C1-4 alkoxy, preferably, methoxy.
  • In one embodiment of formula IV-B, R1 is hydrogen or methyl, R2 is methyl or 5-fluorobenzimidazol-3-yl, X1, X3, and X4 each is CH2, R3 is C1-4 alkyl, benzyl optionally substituted with carboxy-C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 alkylsulfonyl, acyl, methylcarboxyethyl, C1-4 alkylcarbonyl, or benzoyl, and ring A is phenyl substituted with 2-hydroxy, 2-trifluoromethyl, or 2-C1-4 alkoxy, preferably, methoxy.
  • In one embodiment of formula IV-B, R1 and R2, each is methyl, X1, X3, and X4 each is CH2, R3 is C1-4 alkyl, benzyl optionally substituted with carboxy-C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 alkylsulfonyl, or benzoyl, and ring A is phenyl substituted with 2-hydroxy or 2-C1-4 alkoxy, preferably, methoxy.
  • In one embodiment of formula IV-B, R1 and R2, each is methyl, X1, X3, and X4 each is CH2, R3 is C1-4 alkyl, or benzyl optionally substituted with carboxy-C1-4 alkyl, and ring A is phenyl substituted with 2-hydroxy or 2-C1-4 alkoxy, preferably, methoxy.
  • In one embodiment of formula IV-B, R1 and R2, each is methyl, X1, X3, and X4 each is CH2, R3 is C1-4 alkyl, benzyl optionally substituted with carboxy-C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and ring A is 2-hydroxy phenyl or 2-C1-4 alkoxyphenyl.
  • In one embodiment of formula IV-B, R1 and R2, each is methyl, X1, X3, and X4 each is CH2, R3 is benzyl optionally substituted with carboxy-C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and ring A is 2-hydroxy phenyl.
  • In one embodiment of formula IV-M, R1 is hydrogen or methyl, and R2 is methyl, benzimidazol-3-yl, 5-methyl-imidazol-3-yl, ring A is 2-hydroxyphenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 2-trifluoromethylphenyl or phenyl.
  • In one embodiment of formula IV-M, R1 is hydrogen or methyl, and R2 is methyl, benzimidazol-3-yl, 5-methyl-imidazol-3-yl, ring A is 2-trifluoromethylphenyl or phenyl.
  • In another embodiment, Ring A is optionally substituted phenyl, and compounds of formula V are provided:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00028
  • wherein each of R1, R2, X1, X2, X3, X4, R7 and y are as defined generally and in subsets above and herein.
  • In certain preferred embodiments of formula V, one or two of X1, X2, X3, or X4 is independently NR3, S, C═O, O, S═O, or SO2, and the remaining two or three are each CHR4. In more preferred embodiments of formula V, one of X1, X2, X3, or X4 is NR3, S, or O, and the remaining three are each CHR4, and compounds have one of the following structures:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00029
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00030
  • As described generally above for compounds of general formula V-A through V-N, R1 and R2 are each independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 aliphatic, a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, wherein R1, R2, or any ring formed by R1 and R2 taken together, are each independently optionally substituted at one or more carbon atoms with 0-4 occurrences of —R5, and at one or more substitutable nitrogen atoms with —R6.
  • In certain preferred embodiments, for compounds of any of V-A through V-N, neither R1 nor R2 is hydrogen, and R1 and R2 are each independently selected from a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2. In more preferred embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N, both R1 and R2 are an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2. In yet other preferred embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N, when R1 and R2 are an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2, preferred R1 and R2 groups are optionally substituted methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, n-propyl, propenyl, cyclobutyl, (CO)OCH2CH3, (CH2)2OCH3, CH2(CO)OCH2CH3, CH2(CO)OCH3, CH(CH3)CH2CH3, or t-butyl, or n-butyl. Most preferred R1 and R2 groups of any of formulae V-A through V-N include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In other preferred embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N, one of R1 or R2 is hydrogen and the other of R1 or R2 is a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. In other embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N, one of R1 or R2 is hydrogen, and the other of R1 or R2 is an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2.
  • For those embodiments described above and herein, for any of formulae V-A through V-N, where R1 or R2 is a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, or a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S, preferred R1 and R2 groups are selected from:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00031
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00032
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00033
  • wherein each R5 and R6 is as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4. Most preferred rings include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In still other embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N, R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen or oxygen. In certain preferred embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N, R1 and R2 are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound and form a 3-8 membered heterocyclyl group selected from:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00034
  • wherein each R5 and R6 is as previously defined and each z is independently 0-4.
  • In other preferred embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N, R1 and R2 taken together are optionally substituted pyrrolidin-1-yl (ff), piperidin1-yl (dd), piperazin-1-yl (cc), or morpholin-4-yl (ee).
  • As described generally above for any of formulae V-A through V-N, when R1 or R2 is a 5-6 membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 3-7 membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or when R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted 3-8 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, the ring can be substituted with up to four independent occurrences of R5.
  • In preferred embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N, z is 0-2. In other preferred embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N, z is 0 and the ring is unsubstituted.
  • Preferred R5 groups of any of formulae V-A through V-N, when present, are independently halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, OR′, —CH2OR′, SR′, —CH2SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, SO2R′, or —SO2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N, R5 groups are each independently Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CO(C1-C4alkyl), —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2(C1-C4alkyl), —SO2NH2, —SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy. Most preferred R5 groups of any of formulae V-A through V-N include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In preferred embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N R6 groups are independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, —CH2OR′, —CH2SR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, SO2R′, or —S(O)2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N, R6 groups are each independently H, Me, CF3, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C1-C4alkyl), —CONH2, —COO(C1-C4alkyl), —CH2OH, —SO2(C1-C4alkyl), —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, or optionally substituted phenyl or benzyl. Most preferred R6 groups of any of formulae V-A through V-N include those shown below in Table 2.
  • As described generally above for compounds of formula V-A through V-N, one or more of X1, X2, X3, or X4 is CHR4 or NR3. In preferred embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N, R4 groups are independently hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R)2, OR′, —CH2OR′, SR′, —CH2SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, SO2R′, or —SO2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N, R4 groups are each independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CO(C1-C4alkyl), —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2(C1-C4alkyl), —SO2NH2, —SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy. Most preferred R4 groups of any of formulae V-A through V-N include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In preferred embodiments of any of formulae V-A through V-N, R3 groups are hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, —CH2OR′, —CH2SR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, SO2R′, or —S(O)2N(R′)2. In more preferred embodiments, R3 groups are each independently H, Me, CF3, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C1-C4alkyl), —CONH2, —COO(C1-C4alkyl), —CH2OH, —SO2(C1-C4alkyl), —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, or optionally substituted phenyl or benzyl. Most preferred R3 groups of any of formulae V-A through V-N include those shown below in Table 2.
  • In yet other preferred embodiments of formula V y is 1 and compounds have the general formula VI:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00035
  • wherein each of R1, R2, X1, X2, X3, X4, and p is as described generally above and herein, and R7 is halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, —OR′, —CH2OR′, —SR′, —CH2SR′, —COOR′, —NRCOR′, —CON(R′)2, or —S(O)2N(R′)2.
  • In other preferred embodiments of formula VI, p is 0, 1, or 2, and compounds have the structure of formulae VI-A through VI-N:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00036
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00037
  • wherein each R1, R2, X1, X2, X3, and X4 is as described generally above and herein, and R7 is halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, —OR′, —CH2OR′, —SR′, —CH2SR′, —COOR′, —NRCOR′, —CON(R′)2, or —S(O)2N(R′)2.
  • In still other preferred embodiments compounds of the invention are defined according to any of formulae VI, VI-A, VI-B, VI-C, VI-D, VI-E, VI-F, VI-G, VI-H, VI-I, VI-J, VI-K, VI-L, VI-M, or VI-N, and one or more of, or all of, R1, R2, R3 or R4 are further defined according to one or more of, or all of, the following groups:
      • a. R1 and R2 are each independently selected from a 5- or 6-membered aryl ring having 0-5 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S; a 3-7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, or S; or an optionally substituted C1-4 aliphatic group, wherein one or more methylene units in the C1-4 aliphatic group are optionally and independently replaced with NR, O, (CO)O, O(CO), NR(CO), (CO)NR, SO2(NR), or (NR)SO2;
      • b. each occurrence of R3 is independently hydrogen, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, —CH2OR′, —CH2SR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, SO2R′, or —S(O)2N(R′)2; and
      • c. each occurrence of R4 is independently hydrogen, halogen, CN, NO2, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-6)alkyl, —N(R′)2, —CH2N(R′)2, OR′, —CH2OR′, SR′, —CH2SR′, COOR′, —NRCOR′, —(CH2)2N(R′)2, —(CH2)2OR′, —(CH2)2SR′, —COR′, —CON(R′)2, SO2R′, or —SO2N(R′)2.
  • In still other preferred embodiments compounds of the invention are defined according to any of formulae VI, VI-A, VI-B, VI-C, VI-D, VI-E, VI-F, VI-G, VI-H, VI-I, VI-J, VI-K, VI-L, VI-M, or VI-N, and one or more of, or all of, R1, R2, R3 or R4 are further defined according to one or more of, or all of, the following groups:
      • a. R1 and R2 are each independently optionally substituted methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, n-propyl, propenyl, cyclobutyl, (CO)OCH2CH3, (CH2)2OCH3, CH2(CO)OCH2CH3, CH2(CO)OCH3, CH(CH3)CH2CH3, or t-butyl, or n-butyl;
      • b. each occurrence of R3 is independently H, Me, CF3, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C1-C4alkyl), —CONH2, —COO(C1-C4alkyl), —CH2OH, —SO2(C1-C4alkyl), —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, or optionally substituted phenyl or benzyl; and
      • c. each occurrence of R4 is independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CO(C1-C4alkyl), —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2(C1-C4alkyl), —SO2NH2, —SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy.
  • In still other preferred embodiments compounds of the invention are defined according to any of formulae VI, VI-A, VI-B, VI-C, VI-D, VI-E, VI-F, VI-G, VI-H, VI-I, VI-J, VI-K, VI-L, VI-M, or VI-N, and one or more of, or all of, R1, R2, R3, R4 or R7 are further defined according to one or more of, or all of, the following groups:
      • a. R1 and R2 are each independently optionally substituted methyl, ethyl, cyclopropyl, n-propyl, propenyl, cyclobutyl, (CO)OCH2CH3, (CH2)2OCH3, CH2(CO)OCH2CH3, CH2(CO)OCH3, CH(CH3)CH2CH3, or t-butyl, or n-butyl;
      • b. each occurrence of R3 is independently H, Me, CF3, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, CO(C1-C4alkyl), —CONH2, —COO(C1-C4alkyl), —CH2OH, —SO2(C1-C4alkyl), —SO2NH2, SO2N(CH3)2, or optionally substituted phenyl or benzyl;
      • c. each occurrence of R4 is independently H, Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, —O(CH2)2OCH3, —CO(C1-C4alkyl), —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2(C1-C4alkyl), —SO2NH2, —SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy; and
      • d. R7 is Cl, Br, F, CF3, Me, Et, CN, NO2, —COOH, NH2, —N(CH3)2, —N(Et)2, —N(iPr)2, O(CH2)2OCH3, —CO(C1-C4alkyl), —CONH2, —COOCH3, —OH, —CH2OH, —NHCOCH3, —SO2(C1-C4alkyl), —SO2NH2, —SO2N(CH3)2, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, morpholino, or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-4 alkoxy, phenyl, phenyloxy, benzyl, or benzyloxy.
  • Representative examples of compounds as described above and herein are set forth below and in Table 2.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00038
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00039
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00040
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00041
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00042
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00043
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00044
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00045
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00046
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00047
  • TABLE 2
    Examples of Compounds of Formula I:
    Cmpd Structure
    1
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00048
    2
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00049
    3
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00050
    4
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00051
    5
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00052
    6
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00053
    7
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00054
    8
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00055
    9
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00056
    10
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00057
    11
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00058
    12
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00059
    13
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00060
    14
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00061
    15
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00062
    16
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00063
    17
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00064
    18
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00065
    19
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00066
    20
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00067
    21
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00068
    22
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00069
    23
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00070
    24
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00071
    25
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00072
    26
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00073
    27
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00074
    28
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00075
    29
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00076
    30
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00077
    31
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00078
    32
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00079
    33
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00080
    34
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00081
    35
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00082
    36
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00083
    37
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00084
    38
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00085
    39
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00086
    40
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00087
    41
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00088
    42
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00089
    43
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00090
    44
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00091
    45
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00092
    46
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00093
    47
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00094
    48
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00095
    49
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00096
    50
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00097
    51
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00098
    52
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00099
    53
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00100
    54
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00101
    55
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00102
    56
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00103
    57
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00104
    58
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00105
    59
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00106
    60
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00107
    61
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00108
    62
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00109
    63
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00110
    64
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00111
    65
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00112
    66
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00113
    67
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00114
    68
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00115
    69
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00116
    70
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00117
    71
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00118
    72
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00119
    73
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00120
    74
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00121
    75
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00122
    76
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00123
    77
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00124
    78
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00125
    79
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00126
    80
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00127
    81
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00128
    82
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00129
    83
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00130
    84
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00131
    85
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00132
    86
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00133
    87
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00134
    88
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00135
    89
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00136
    90
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00137
    91
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00138
    92
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00139
    93
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00140
    94
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00141
    95
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00142
    96
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00143
    97
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00144
    98
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00145
    99
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00146
    100
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00147
    101
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00148
    102
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00149
    103
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00150
    104
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00151
    105
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00152
    106
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00153
    107
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00154
    108
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00155
    109
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00156
    110
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00157
    111
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00158
    112
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00159
    113
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00160
    114
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00161
    115
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00162
    116
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00163
    117
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00164
    118
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00165
    119
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00166
    120
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00167
    121
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00168
    122
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00169
    123
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00170
    124
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00171
    125
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00172
    126
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00173
    127
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00174
    128
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00175
    129
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00176
    130
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00177
    131
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00178
    132
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00179
    133
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00180
    134
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00181
    135
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00182
    136
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00183
    137
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00184
    138
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00185
    139
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00186
    140
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00187
    141
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00188
    142
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00189
    143
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00190
    144
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00191
    145
    Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00192
  • 4. General Synthetic Methodology:
  • The compounds of this invention may be prepared in general by methods known to those skilled in the art for analogous compounds, as illustrated by the general scheme below, and the preparative examples that follow.
  • As described in more detail in the Examples herein, and as shown generally in Scheme A below, reaction of a desired heterocyclohexanone-1-carboxylate and an amidine in ethanol with NaOEt at 0° C., and subsequent reaction with phosphorus oxychloride, boron tribromide and a desired amine, followed by debenzylation and reaction with an appropriate chloride generates compounds of general formula I′.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00193
  • It will be appreciated that this method can be utilized to prepare a variety of compounds.
  • Scheme B below depicts the preparation of C7_Aza6 compounds and elaboration:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00194
  • Scheme C below depicts the preparation of C5_Aza6 compounds:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00195
  • Scheme D below depicts the preparation of C8_Aza6 compounds and elaborations:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00196
  • Scheme E below depicts the preparation of C5_Oxa6 compounds:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00197
  • Scheme F below depicts the preparation of C6_Oxa6 compounds:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00198
  • Scheme G below depicts the preparation of C7_Oxa6 compounds:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00199
  • Scheme H below depicts the preparation of C8_Oxa6 compounds:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00200
  • Scheme I below depicts the preparation of C5_thia6 compounds:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00201
  • Scheme J below depicts the preparation of C6_Thia6 compounds:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00202
  • Scheme K below depicts the preparation of C7_Thia6 compounds:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00203
  • Scheme L below depicts the preparation of C8_Thia6 compounds:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00204
  • Scheme M below depicts the preparation of C6_thia5 compounds:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00205
  • Scheme N below depicts the preparation of C6_oxa5 compounds:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00206
  • As described in more detail in the Examples herein, and as shown generally in Scheme O below, reaction of a desired cyclohexanone-1-carboxylate and an amidine in ethanol with NaOEt at 0° C., and subsequent reaction with phosphorus oxychloride, boron tribromide, and a desired amine generates compounds of general formula I′.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00207
  • It will be appreciated that this method can be utilized to prepare a variety of compounds.
  • Scheme P below depicts the preparation of bicyclic β-ketoesters:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00208
  • Additional conditions for the preparation of compounds of formula I′ and subsets thereof is presented below in Scheme Q.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00209
  • In certain other embodiments, Ring A represents an N-linked heteroaryl or heterocyclyl group (as depicted below in Scheme R, where two occurrences of R′ are taken together below to form an optionally substituted 5-8-membered cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring having 0-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur).
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00210
  • In still other embodiments, compounds of the invention are prepared via Diels-Alder reactions to provide substituted tetrohydroquinazoline moieties as depicted in Scheme S below:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00211
  • Further functionalization of inventive compounds can be achieved via exemplary reactions as depicted below in Schemes T and U:
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00212
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00213
  • Although certain exemplary embodiments are depicted and described above and herein, it will be appreciated that a compounds of the invention can be prepared according to the methods described generally above using appropriate starting materials by methods generally available to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • 5. Uses, Formulation and Administration
  • Pharmaceutically Acceptable Compositions
  • As discussed above, the present invention provides compounds that are inhibitors of voltage-gated sodium ion channels, and thus the present compounds are useful for the treatment of diseases, disorders, and conditions including, but not limited to acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain, arthritis, migrane, cluster headaches, trigeminal neuralgia, herpetic neuralgia, general neuralgias, epilepsy or epilepsy conditions, neurodegenerative disorders, psychiatric disorders such as anxiety and depression, myotonia, arrythmia, movement disorders, neuroendocrine disorders, ataxia, multiple sclerosis, irritable bowel syndrome, and incontinence. Accordingly, in another aspect of the present invention, pharmaceutically acceptable compositions are provided, wherein these compositions comprise any of the compounds as described herein, and optionally comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, adjuvant or vehicle. In certain embodiments, these compositions optionally further comprise one or more additional therapeutic agents.
  • It will also be appreciated that certain of the compounds of present invention can exist in free form for treatment, or where appropriate, as a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof. According to the present invention, a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative includes, but is not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, salts of such esters, or any other adduct or derivative which upon administration to a patient in need is capable of providing, directly or indirectly, a compound as otherwise described herein, or a metabolite or residue thereof.
  • As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to those salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgement, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. A “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” means any non-toxic salt or salt of an ester of a compound of this invention that, upon administration to a recipient, is capable of providing, either directly or indirectly, a compound of this invention or an inhibitorily active metabolite or residue thereof. As used herein, the term “inhibitorily active metabolite or residue thereof” means that a metabolite or residue thereof is also an inhibitor of a voltage-gated sodium ion channel.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge, et al. describe pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 1977, 66, 1-19, incorporated herein by reference. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of this invention include those derived from suitable inorganic and organic acids and bases. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable, nontoxic acid addition salts are salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid or with organic acids such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange. Other pharmaceutically acceptable salts include adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, gluconate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, phosphate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, stearate, succinate, sulfate, tartrate, thiocyanate, p-toluenesulfonate, undecanoate, valerate salts, and the like. Salts derived from appropriate bases include alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, ammonium and N30 (C1-4alkyl)4 salts. This invention also envisions the quaternization of any basic nitrogen-containing groups of the compounds disclosed herein. Water or oil-soluble or dispersable products may be obtained by such quaternization. Representative alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and the like. Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, loweralkyl sulfonate and aryl sulfonate.
  • As described above, the pharmaceutically acceptable compositions of the present invention additionally comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, adjuvant, or vehicle, which, as used herein, includes any and all solvents, diluents, or other liquid vehicle, dispersion or suspension aids, surface active agents, isotonic agents, thickening or emulsifying agents, preservatives, solid binders, lubricants and the like, as suited to the particular dosage form desired. Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Sixteenth Edition, E. W. Martin (Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1980) discloses various carriers used in formulating pharmaceutically acceptable compositions and known techniques for the preparation thereof. Except insofar as any conventional carrier medium is incompatible with the compounds of the invention, such as by producing any undesirable biological effect or otherwise interacting in a deleterious manner with any other component(s) of the pharmaceutically acceptable composition, its use is contemplated to be within the scope of this invention. Some examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include, but are not limited to, ion exchangers, alumina, aluminum stearate, lecithin, serum proteins, such as human serum albumin, buffer substances such as phosphates, glycine, sorbic acid, or potassium sorbate, partial glyceride mixtures of saturated vegetable fatty acids, water, salts or electrolytes, such as protamine sulfate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, potassium hydrogen phosphate, sodium chloride, zinc salts, colloidal silica, magnesium trisilicate, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyacrylates, waxes, polyethylene-polyoxypropylene-block polymers, wool fat, sugars such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; starches such as corn starch and potato starch; cellulose and its derivatives such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; powdered tragacanth; malt; gelatin; talc; excipients such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; oils such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil; safflower oil; sesame oil; olive oil; corn oil and soybean oil; glycols; such a propylene glycol or polyethylene glycol; esters such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; agar; buffering agents such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; alginic acid; pyrogen-free water; isotonic saline; Ringer's solution; ethyl alcohol, and phosphate buffer solutions, as well as other non-toxic compatible lubricants such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, releasing agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the composition, according to the judgment of the formulator.
  • Uses of Compounds and Pharmaceutically Acceptable Compositions
  • In yet another aspect, a method for the treatment or lessening the severity of acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain, arthritis, migrane, cluster headaches, trigeminal neuralgia, herpetic neuralgia, general neuralgias, epilepsy or epilepsy conditions, neurodegenerative disorders, psychiatric disorders such as anxiety and depression, myotonia, arrythmia, movement disorders, neuroendocrine disorders, ataxia, multiple sclerosis, irritable bowel syndrome, or incontinence is provided comprising administering an effective amount of a compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable composition comprising a compound to a subject in need thereof. In certain preferred embodiments, a method for the treatment or lessening the severity of acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain is provided comprising administering an effective amount of a compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable composition to a subject in need thereof. In certain embodiments of the present invention an “effective amount” of the compound or pharmaceutically acceptable composition is that amount effective for treating or lessening the severity of one or more of acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain, epilepsy or epilepsy conditions, neurodegenerative disorders, psychiatric disorders such as anxiety and depression, myotonia, arrythmia, movement disorders, neuroendocrine disorders, ataxia, multiple sclerosis, irritable bowel syndrome, or incontinence.
  • The compounds and compositions, according to the method of the present invention, may be administered using any amount and any route of administration effective for treating or lessening the severity of one or more of acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain, epilepsy or epilepsy conditions, neurodegenerative disorders, psychiatric disorders such as anxiety and depression, myotonia, arrythmia, movement disorders, neuroendocrine disorders, ataxia, multiple sclerosis, irritable bowel syndrome, or incontinence. The exact amount required will vary from subject to subject, depending on the species, age, and general condition of the subject, the severity of the infection, the particular agent, its mode of administration, and the like. The compounds of the invention are preferably formulated in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. The expression “dosage unit form” as used herein refers to a physically discrete unit of agent appropriate for the patient to be treated. It will be understood, however, that the total daily usage of the compounds and compositions of the present invention will be decided by the attending physician within the scope of sound medical judgment. The specific effective dose level for any particular patient or organism will depend upon a variety of factors including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; the activity of the specific compound employed; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidental with the specific compound employed, and like factors well known in the medical arts. The term “patient”, as used herein, means an animal, preferably a mammal, and most preferably a human.
  • The pharmaceutically acceptable compositions of this invention can be administered to humans and other animals orally, rectally, parenterally, intracisternally, intravaginally, intraperitoneally, topically (as by powders, ointments, or drops), bucally, as an oral or nasal spray, or the like, depending on the severity of the infection being treated. In certain embodiments, the compounds of the invention may be administered orally or parenterally at dosage levels of about 0.01 mg/kg to about 50 mg/kg and preferably from about 1 mg/kg to about 25 mg/kg, of subject body weight per day, one or more times a day, to obtain the desired therapeutic effect.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include, but are not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active compounds, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethylformamide, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof. Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents.
  • Injectable preparations, for example, sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents. The sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution, suspension or emulsion in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1,3-butanediol. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution, U.S.P. and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid are used in the preparation of injectables.
  • The injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium prior to use.
  • In order to prolong the effect of a compound of the present invention, it is often desirable to slow the absorption of the compound from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material with poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the compound then depends upon its rate of dissolution that, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally administered compound form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the compound in an oil vehicle. Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the compound in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending upon the ratio of compound to polymer and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of compound release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the compound in liposomes or microemulsions that are compatible with body tissues.
  • Compositions for rectal or vaginal administration are preferably suppositories which can be prepared by mixing the compounds of this invention with suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • Solid dosage forms for oral administration include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules. In such solid dosage forms, the active compound is mixed with at least one inert, pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate and/or a) fillers or extenders such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and silicic acid, b) binders such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinylpyrrolidinone, sucrose, and acacia, c) humectants such as glycerol, d) disintegrating agents such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate, e) solution retarding agents such as paraffin, f) absorption accelerators such as quaternary ammonium compounds, g) wetting agents such as, for example, cetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate, h) absorbents such as kaolin and bentonite clay, and i) lubricants such as talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the dosage form may also comprise buffering agents.
  • Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like. The solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions that can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
  • The active compounds can also be in microencapsulated form with one or more excipients as noted above. The solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings, release controlling coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. In such solid dosage forms the active compound may be admixed with at least one inert diluent such as sucrose, lactose or starch. Such dosage forms may also comprise, as is normal practice, additional substances other than inert diluents, e.g., tableting lubricants and other tableting aids such a magnesium stearate and microcrystalline cellulose. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the dosage forms may also comprise buffering agents. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions that can be used include polymeric substances and waxes.
  • Dosage forms for topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants or patches. The active component is admixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and any needed preservatives or buffers as may be required. Ophthalmic formulation, eardrops, and eye drops are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention. Additionally, the present invention contemplates the use of transdermal patches, which have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound to the body. Such dosage forms are prepared by dissolving or dispensing the compound in the proper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or by dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
  • As described generally above, the compounds of the invention are useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated sodium ion channels or calcium channels, preferably N-type calcium channels. In one embodiment, the compounds and compositions of the invention are inhibitors of one or more of NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2, and thus, without wishing to be bound by any particular theory, the compounds and compositions are particularly useful for treating or lessening the severity of a disease, condition, or disorder where activation or hyperactivity of one or more of NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2 is implicated in the disease, condition, or disorder. When activation or hyperactivity of NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2, is implicated in a particular disease, condition, or disorder, the disease, condition, or disorder may also be referred to as a “NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8 or NaV1.9-mediated disease, condition or disorder” or a “CaV2.2-mediated condition or disorder”. Accordingly, in another aspect, the present invention provides a method for treating or lessening the severity of a disease, condition, or disorder where activation or hyperactivity of one or more of NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2 is implicated in the disease state.
  • The activity of a compound utilized in this invention as an inhibitor of NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2 may be assayed according to methods described generally in the Examples herein, or according to methods available to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • In certain exemplary embodiments, compounds of the invention are useful as inhibitors of NaV1.8. In other embodiments, compounds of the invention are useful as inhibitors of NaV1.8 and CaV2.2. In still other embodiments, compounds of the invention are useful as inhibitors of CaV2.2.
  • It will also be appreciated that the compounds and pharmaceutically acceptable compositions of the present invention can be employed in combination therapies, that is, the compounds and pharmaceutically acceptable compositions can be administered concurrently with, prior to, or subsequent to, one or more other desired therapeutics or medical procedures. The particular combination of therapies (therapeutics or procedures) to employ in a combination regimen will take into account compatibility of the desired therapeutics and/or procedures and the desired therapeutic effect to be achieved. It will also be appreciated that the therapies employed may achieve a desired effect for the same disorder (for example, an inventive compound may be administered concurrently with another agent used to treat the same disorder), or they may achieve different effects (e.g., control of any adverse effects). As used herein, additional therapeutic agents that are normally administered to treat or prevent a particular disease, or condition, are known as “appropriate for the disease, or condition, being treated”.
  • The amount of additional therapeutic agent present in the compositions of this invention will be no more than the amount that would normally be administered in a composition comprising that therapeutic agent as the only active agent. Preferably the amount of additional therapeutic agent in the presently disclosed compositions will range from about 50% to 100% of the amount normally present in a composition comprising that agent as the only therapeutically active agent.
  • The compounds of this invention or pharmaceutically acceptable compositions thereof may also be incorporated into compositions for coating an implantable medical device, such as prostheses, artificial valves, vascular grafts, stents and catheters. Accordingly, the present invention, in another aspect, includes a composition for coating an implantable device comprising a compound of the present invention as described generally above, and in classes and subclasses herein, and a carrier suitable for coating said implantable device. In still another aspect, the present invention includes an implantable device coated with a composition comprising a compound of the present invention as described generally above, and in classes and subclasses herein, and a carrier suitable for coating said implantable device. Suitable coatings and the general preparation of coated implantable devices are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,099,562; 5,886,026; and 5,304,121. The coatings are typically biocompatible polymeric materials such as a hydrogel polymer, polymethyldisiloxane, polycaprolactone, polyethylene glycol, polylactic acid, ethylene vinyl acetate, and mixtures thereof. The coatings may optionally be further covered by a suitable topcoat of fluorosilicone, polysaccarides, polyethylene glycol, phospholipids or combinations thereof to impart controlled release characteristics in the composition.
  • Another aspect of the invention relates to inhibiting NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2 activity in a biological sample or a patient, which method comprises administering to the patient, or contacting said biological sample with a compound of the present invention or a composition comprising said compound. The term “biological sample”, as used herein, includes, without limitation, cell cultures or extracts thereof; biopsied material obtained from a mammal or extracts thereof; and blood, saliva, urine, feces, semen, tears, or other body fluids or extracts thereof.
  • Inhibition of NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2 activity in a biological sample is useful for a variety of purposes that are known to one of skill in the art. Examples of such purposes include, but are not limited to, the study of sodium ion channels in biological and pathological phenomena; and the comparative evaluation of new sodium ion channel inhibitors.
  • In order that the invention described herein may be more fully understood, the following examples are set forth. It should be understood that these examples are for illustrative purposes only and are not to be construed as limiting this invention in any manner.
  • EXAMPLES Synthesis of Exemplary Compounds of the Invention
  • Methods:
  • (A) Micromass MUX LCT 4 channel LC/MS, Waters 60F pump, Gilson 215 4 probe autosampler, Gilson 849 injection module, 1.5 mL/min/column flow rate, 10-99% CH3CN (0.035% TFA)/H2O (0.05% TFA) gradient, Phenomenex Luna 5u C18 columns (50×4.60 mm), Waters MUX UV-2488 UV detector, Cedex 75 ELSD detectors.
  • (B) PESciex API-150-EX LC/MS, Shimadzu LC-8A pumps, Gilson 215 autosampler, Gilson 819 injection module, 3.0 mL/min flow rate, 10-99% CH3CN (0.035% TFA)/H2O (0.05% TFA) gradient, Phenomenex Luna 5u C18 column (50×4.60 mm), Shimadzu SPD-10A UV/Vis detector, Cedex 75 ELSD detector.
  • (C) PESciex API-150-EX LC/MS, Shimadzu LC-8A pumps, Gilson 215 autosampler, Gilson 819 injection module, 3.0 mL/min flow rate, 40-99% CH3CN (0.035% TFA)/H2O (0.05% TFA) gradient, Phenomenex Luna 5u C18 column (50×4.60 mm), Shimadzu SPD-10A UV/Vis detector, Cedex 75 ELSD detector.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00214
  • To a solution of ethyl 4-methyl-2-cyclohexanone-1-carboxylate 1 (4.7 g, 26.4 mmol) and 2-methoxy-benzamidine (5.7 g, 26.4 mmol) in ethanol (100 mL) was added NaOEt (21% in EtOH, 39.4 mL, 105.6 mmol) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and was then heated to 90° C. for 12 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the solvent was removed, and the residue was taken up in ice water, extracted with DCM (50 mL×2), dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated to give a crude yellow solid. The crude mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography (65% EtOAc/35% hexane) to afford 2 (2.7 g, 9.9 mmol, 38% yield) as a white solid. LC/MS (Method C: 10-99% CH3CN/H2O) M+1 (obs)=272.0 retention time 2.77 min.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00215
  • 2-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-7-methyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-3H-quinazolin-4-one 2 (2.2 g, 8.15 mmol) was dissolved in phosphorus oxychloride (50 mL) and heated to 90° C. for 3 hours. The solution was cooled to room temperature and solvent removed in vacuo. The residue was taken up in ice water, neuralized with sat aqueous NaHCO3, extracted with dichloromethane (150 mL) (PH=10), and concentrated to afford 3 (2.2 g, 7.61 mmol, 93% yield) as light yellow solid. LC/MS (Method C: 10-99% CH3CN/H2O) M+1 (obs)=290.0 retention time 3.73 min.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00216
  • To a solution of 4-chloroquinazoline 3 (2.2 g, 7.86 mmol) in dichloromethane (100 mL) in a round-bottomed flask equipped with rubber septum, stirring bar and nitrogen balloon was added boron tribromide (1M in DCM, 39.3 mmol) dropwise at −78° C. The reaction was warmed to room temperature and allowed to stir for 3 hours at room temperature. Then the reaction mixture was cooled to −78° C. and quenched with saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (50 mL). After stirring for 1 hour at room temperature, the mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (2×100 mL), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to afford 4 (2.1 g, 7.76 mmol, 97% yield) as a light pink solid. LC/MS, (Method C: 10-99% CH3CN/H2O) M+1 (obs)=275.0 retention time 4.60 min.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00217
  • To a solution of 2-(4-chloro-7-methyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinazolin-2-yl)-phenol 4 (50 mg, 0.18 mmol) in THF (2 mL) was added triethylamine (0.072 mL, 0.54 mmol) and dimethylamine (1M in THF, 0.9 mL, 0.9 mmol). After stirring at room temperature overnight, the solvent was removed in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by using Gilson HPLC to afford the TFA salt of I-2 (47 mg, 0.12 mmol, 67% yield) as a white solid. LC/MS (Method C: 10-99% CH3CN/H2O) M+1 (obs)=284.0 retention time 3.17 min.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00218
  • A solution of ethyl 4-oxo-tetranhydrothiophene-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester 6 (1.0 g, 26.4 mmol) and 2-methoxy-benzamidine (5.7 g, 26.4 mmol) in ethanol (100 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature overnight, then heated at reflux for 4 hours. After cooling to ambient temperature, the solvent was removed in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash chromatography on silica (65% EtOAc/35% hexane) to afford 7 (2.7 g, 10.4 mmol, 39% yield) as a white solid. LC/MS (Method C: 10-99% CH3CN/H2O) M+1 (obs)=261.0, retention time 2.89 min.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00219
  • To a solution of 2-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5,7-dihydro-3H-thieno[3,4-d]pyrimidine-4-one 7 (1.0 g, 3.94 mmol) in dichloromethane (100 mL) was added MCPBA (1.8 g, 7.9 mmol) in portions at ambient temperature. After stirring for 3 hours at ambient temperature, the reaction was quenched with saturated aqueous sodium thiosulfate, washed with aqueous sodium bicarbonate, water, and then extracted twice with 50 mL portions of dichloromethane. The combined organic layer was dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated in vacuo to give the crude product as a yellow solid. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel (65% EtOAc/35% hexane) gave 8 (1.1 g, 3.8 mmol, 97% yield) as a white solid. LC/MS (Method C: 10-99% CH3CN/H2O) M+1 (obs)=293.0, retention time 2.39 min.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00220
  • A solution of 2-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-6,6-dioxo-3,5,6,7-tetrahydro-6-thieno[3,4-d]pyrimidine-4-one 8 (1.0 g, 3.4 mmol) and diethyl maleate (4.3 mL, 34 mmol) in toluene (100 mL), was refluxed for 18 hours in a 150 mL round-bottomed flask equipped with a Dean-Stark trap. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude mixture purified by flash chromatography on silica gel to afford 9 (1.0 g, 2.7 mmol, 79% yield) as a white solid. LC/MS (Method C: 10-99% CH3CN/H2O) M+1 (obs)=372.8, retention time 2.70 min.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00221
  • A 250 mL roundbottom flask, equipped with a reflux condenser, was charged with a mixture of 11 (2.0 g, 5.8 mmol), N,N-dimethylaniline (0.70 g, 5.8 mmol), and phosphoryl chloride (8.9 g, 57.7 mmol). The mixture was heated, with stirring, at 95° C. for 10 minutes. The clear solution was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was poured onto ice (250 g) followed by the addition of CH2Cl2 (500 mL). The mixture was made strongly basic by the dropwise addition of 50% aqueous NaOH solution. The organic portion was dried (MgSO4) and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography using (70% hexanes, 30% ethyl acetate) to obtain 11 (1.6 g, 4.3 mmol, 75% yield) as a light yellow oil. LC/MS (Method C: 10-99% CH3CN/H2O) M+1 (obs)=375.3; Rt=1.90.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00222
  • A 250 mL roundbottom flask was charged with a solution of 12 (3.5 g, 9.6 mmol), and CH2Cl2 (120 mL). To this solution was added boron tribromide (28.8 mL, 28.8 mmol, 1.0M in CH2Cl2) dropwise over a period of 5 minutes. The solution was stirred at 25° C. for 30 minutes. The mixture was poured into saturated aqueous NaHCO3 solution (500 mL) followed by the addition of CH2Cl2 (300 mL). The organic portion was dried (MgSO4) and treated with triethylamine (1.4 mL, 10.0 mmol) followed by the addition of dimethylamine (14.4 mL, 28.8 mmol, 2.0 M in THF). The mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 1 hour. The mixture was evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography using (70% hexanes, 30% ethyl acetate) to obtain I-40 (1.3 g, 3.6 mmol, 39% yield) as a white solid. LC/MS (Method C: 10-99% CH3CN/H2O) M+1 (obs)=361.2; Rt=2.42.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00223
  • A 250 mL roundbottom flask, equipped with a reflux condenser, was charged with a solution of I-40 (1.3 g, 3.6 mmol), AcOH (50 mL), and 10% palladium on carbon (200 mg), under an atmosphere of N2. A hydrogen balloon was introduced to the top of the reflux condenser via a needle pierced septa. The mixture was stirred and heated at 90° C. for 6 hours. The mixture was purged with N2, cooled, filtered, and the filtrate evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure to obtain compound I-48 (1.0 g, 3.6 mmol, 100% yield) as a white solid. LC/MS (Method C: 10-99% CH3CN/H2O) M+1 (obs)=271.2; Rt=2.00.
  • Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00224
  • A 2 mL vial was charged with a solution of 4 (25 mg, 0.09 mmol), triethylamine (19 mg, 18 mmol), and CH2Cl2 (0.5 mL), under an atmosphere of N2. To this solution was added acetyl chloride (7.0 mg, 0.09 mmol). The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 20 minutes. The mixture was purified by HPLC to obtain compound I-49 (32 mg, 0.07 mmol, 80% yield) as a trifluoroacetic acid salt. LC/MS (Method C: 10-99% CH3CN/H2O) M+1 (obs)=313.2; Rt=2.18.
  • Other compounds of formula I have been prepared by methods substantially similar to those described above. The characterization data for these compounds is summarized in Table 3 below and includes HPLC, LC/MS (observed) and 1H NMR data. Compound numbers correspond to the compound numbers listed in Table 2.
  • TABLE 3
    Characterization Data for Selected Compounds of Formula I
    LC-MS LC-MS
    Cmd M + 1 (obs) Rt
    30 284.0 3.23
    31 326.0 3.51
    32 310.2 3.27
    33 270.0 3.04
    34 312.0 3.21
    35 296.2 3.16
    36 284.0 3.17
    37 326.2 3.42
    38 310.4 3.28
    39 312.0 2.59
    40 314.0 1.98
    41 314.0 2.01
    42 341.4 1.73
    43 327.2 1.70
    44 372.2 2.43
    45 325.2 1.96
    46 367.0 2.19
    47 350.0 2.84
    48 350.2 1.64
    49 324.0 2.87
    50 339.0 2.01
    51 338.0 3.10
    52 338.0 3.07
    53 353.2 1.76
    54 338.0 2.50
    55 340.0 2.19
    56 286.0 2.18
    57 312.0 2.39
    58 328.0 2.10
    59 341.2 1.55
    60 359.8 2.93
    61 423.0 2.69
    62 276.0 5.53
    63 258.0 5.57
    64 375.3 1.90
    65 375.4 1.81
    66 255.8 2.39
    67 281.8 2.53
    68 297.8 2.52
    69 297.2 2.83
    70 361.2 2.42
    71 361.4 2.23
    72 271.2 2.00
    73 271.2 1.72
    74 349.3 2.61
    75 363.2 2.76
    76 313.2 2.18
    77 327.3 2.37
    78 349.1 2.52
    79 363.2 2.30
    80 313.2 1.93
    81 327.2 2.41
    82 285.2 2.04
    83 299.2 2.43
    84 290.0 2.49
    85 274.0 2.75
    86 405.4 2.30
    87 419.2 2.52
    88 391.2 2.52
    89 445.2 2.84
    90 429.4 2.79
    91 375.2 2.86
    92 428.2 3.43
    93 412.4 3.06
    94 386.0 2.91
    95 342.0 2.89
    96 383.8 2.79
    97 406.4 1.93
    98 368.2 2.16
    99 254.8 2.20
    100 281.0 2.43
    101 297.0 2.15
    102 295.0 2.57
    103 312.8 2.41
    104 309.0 2.76
    105 255.0 1.88
    106 281.0 2.10
    107 297.2 2.12
    108 295.2 2.41
    109 313.0 2.44
    110 325.2 2.17
    111 309.4 2.63
    112 300.4 2.08
    113 298.3 2.07
    114 243.0 2.47
    115 410.0 2.76
    116 397.2 2.32
    117 324.0 2.93
    118 324.0 2.93
    119 338.0 3.51
    120 326.0 3.02
    121 283.9 2.68
    122 353.9 2.91
    123 309.9 2.73
    124 397.1 3.07
    125 378.1 3.16
    126 283.8 2.65
    127 310.0 2.79
    128 323.9 3.22
    129 326.1 2.97
    130 337.9 3.41
    131 339.1 2.64
    132 397.1 3.26
    133 445.0 3.68
    134 378.2 3.20
    135 338.5 3.31
    136 352.0 3.31
    137 366.2 3.52
    138 425.2 3.39
    139 417.1 3.11
    140 403.1 2.99
    141 431.1 3.23
    142 345.9 3.11
    143 359.9 3.46
    144 339.9 2.91
    145 356.1 3.04
  • Assays for detecting and measuring NaV inhibition Properties of Compounds
  • A) Optical Methods for Assaying NaV Inhibition Properties of Compounds:
  • Compounds of the invention are useful as antagonists of voltage-gated sodium ion channels. Antagonist properties of test compounds were assessed as follows. Cells expressing the NaV of interest were placed into microtiter plates. After an incubation period, the cells were stained with fluorescent dyes sensitive to the transmembrane potential. The test compounds were added to the microtiter plate. The cells were stimulated with either a chemical or electrical means to evoke a NaV dependent membrane potential change from unblocked channels, which was detected and measured with trans-membrane potential-sensitive dyes. Antagonists were detected as a decreased membrane potential response to the stimulus. The optical membrane potential assay utilized voltage-sensitive FRET sensors described by Gonzalez and Tsien (See, Gonzalez, J. E. and R. Y. Tsien (1995) “Voltage sensing by fluorescence resonance energy transfer in single cells” Biophys J 69(4): 1272-80, and Gonzalez, J. E. and R. Y. Tsien (1997) “Improved indicators of cell membrane potential that use fluorescence resonance energy transfer” Chem Biol 4(4): 269-77) in combination with instrumentation for measuring fluorescence changes such as the Voltage/Ion Probe Reader (VIPR®) (See, Gonzalez, J. E., K. Oades, et al. (1999) “Cell-based assays and instrumentation for screening ion-channel targets” Drug Discov Today 4(9): 431-439).
  • B) VIPR® Optical Membrane Potential Assay Method with Chemical Stimulation
  • Cell Handling and Dye Loading
  • 24 hours before the assay on VIPR, CHO cells endogenously expressing a NaV1.2 type voltage-gated NaV are seeded in 96-well poly-lysine coated plates at 60,000 cells per well. Other subtypes are performed in an analogous mode in a cell line expressing the NaV of interest.
    • 1) On the day of the assay, medium is aspirated and cells are washed twice with 225 μL of Bath Solution #2 (BS#2).
    • 2) A 15 uM CC2-DMPE solution is prepared by mixing 5 mM coumarin stock solution with 10% Pluronic 127 1:1 and then dissolving the mix in the appropriate volume of BS#2.
    • 3) After bath solution is removed from the 96-well plates, the cells are loaded with 80 μL of the CC2-DMPE solution. Plates are incubated in the dark for 30 minutes at room temperature.
    • 4) While the cells are being stained with coumarin, a 15 μL oxonol solution in BS#2 is prepared. In addition to DiSBAC2(3), this solution should contain 0.75 mM ABSC1 and 30 μL veratridine (prepared from 10 mM EtOH stock, Sigma #V-5754).
    • 5) After 30 minutes, CC2-DMPE is removed and the cells are washed twice with 225 μL of BS#2. As before, the residual volume should be 40 μL.
    • 6) Upon removing the bath, the cells are loaded with 80 μL of the DiSBAC2(3) solution, after which test compound, dissolved in DMSO, is added to achieve the desired test concentration to each well from the drug addition plate and mixed thoroughly. The volume in the well should be roughly 121 μL. The cells are then incubated for 20-30 minutes.
      • 7) Once the incubation is complete, the cells are ready to be assayed on VIPR® with a sodium addback protocol. 120 μL of Bath solution #1 is added to stimulate the NaV dependent depolarization. 200 μL tetracaine was used as an antagonist positive control for block of the NaV channel.
  • Analysis of VIPR® Data:
  • Data are analyzed and reported as normalized ratios of background-subtracted emission intensities measured in the 460 nm and 580 nm channels. Background intensities are then subtracted from each assay channel. Background intensities are obtained by measuring the emission intensities during the same time periods from identically treated assay wells in which there are no cells. The response as a function of time is then reported as the ratios obtained using the following formula:
  • R ( t ) = ( intensity 460 n m - background 460 n m ) ( intensity 580 n m - background 580 n m )
  • The data is further reduced by calculating the initial (Ri) and final (Rf) ratios. These are the average ratio values during part or all of the pre-stimulation period, and during sample points during the stimulation period. The response to the stimulus R=Rf/Ri is then calculated. For the Na+ addback analysis time windows, baseline is 2-7 sec and final response is sampled at 15-24 sec.
  • Control responses are obtained by performing assays in the presence of a compound with the desired properties (positive control), such as tetracaine, and in the absence of pharmacological agents (negative control). Responses to the negative (N) and positive (P) controls are calculated as above. The compound antagonist activity A is defined as:
  • A = R - P N - P * 100.
  • where R is the ratio response of the test compound
    Solutions [mM]
    • Bath Solution #1: NaCl 160, KCl 4.5, CaCl2 2, MgCl2 1, HEPES 10, pH 7.4 with NaOH
    • Bath Solution #2 TMA-Cl 160, CaCl2 0.1, MgCl2 1, HEPES 10, pH 7.4 with KOH (final K concentration ˜5 mM)
    • CC2-DMPE: prepared as a 5 mM stock solution in DMSO and stored at −20° C.
    • DiSBAC2(3): prepared as a 12 mM stock in DMSO and stored at −20° C.
    • ABSC1: prepared as a 200 mM stock in distilled H2O and stored at room temperature
  • Cell Culture
  • CHO cells are grown in DMEM (Dulbecco's Modified Eagle Medium; GibcoBRL #10569-010) supplemented with 10% FBS (Fetal Bovine Serum, qualified; GibcoBRL #16140-071) and 1% Pen-Strep (Penicillin-Streptomycin; GibcoBRL #15140-122). Cells are grown in vented cap flasks, in 90% humidity and 10% CO2, to 100% confluence. They are usually split by trypsinization 1:10 or 1:20, depending on scheduling needs, and grown for 2-3 days before the next split.
  • C) VIPR® Optical Membrane Potential Assay Method with Electrical Stimulation
  • The following is an example of how NaV1.3 inhibition activity is measured using the optical membrane potential method#2. Other subtypes are performed in an analogous mode in a cell line expressing the NaV of interest.
  • HEK293 cells stably expressing NaV1.3 are plated into 96-well microtiter plates. After an appropriate incubation period, the cells are stained with the voltage sensitive dyes CC2-DMPE/DiSBAC2(3) as follows.
  • Reagents:
  • 100 mg/mL Pluronic F-127 (Sigma #P2443), in dry DMSO
  • 10 mM DiSBAC2(3) (Aurora #00-100-010) in dry DMSO 10 mM CC2-DMPE (Aurora #00-100-008) in dry DMSO 200 mM ABSC1 in H2O
  • Hank's Balanced Salt Solution (Hyclone #SH30268.02) supplemented with 10 mM HEPES (Gibco #15630-080)
  • Loading Protocol:
  • 2×CC2-DMPE=20 μM CC2-DMPE: 10 mM CC2-DMPE is vortexed with an equivalent volume of 10% pluronic, followed by vortexing in required amount of HBSS containing 10 mM HEPES. Each cell plate will require 5 mL of 2×CC2-DMPE. 50 μL of 2×CC2-DMPE is to wells containing washed cells, resulting in a 10 μM final staining concentration. The cells are stained for 30 minutes in the dark at RT.
  • 2× DISBAC2(3) with ABSC1=6 μM DISBAC2(3) and 1 mM ABSC1: The required amount of 10 mM DISBAC2(3) is added to a 50 ml conical tube and mixed with 1 μL 10% pluronic for each mL of solution to be made and vortexed together. Then HBSS/HEPES is added to make up 2× solution. Finally, the ABSC1 is added.
  • The 2× DiSBAC2(3) solution can be used to solvate compound plates. Note that compound plates are made at 2× drug concentration. Wash stained plate again, leaving residual volume of 50 μL. Add 50 μL/well of the 2× DiSBAC2(3) w/ABSC1. Stain for 30 minutes in the dark at RT.
  • The electrical stimulation instrument and methods of use are described in ION Channel Assay Methods PCT/US01/21652, herein incorporated by reference. The instrument comprises a microtiter plate handler, an optical system for exciting the coumarin dye while simultaneously recording the coumarin and oxonol emissions, a waveform generator, a current- or voltage-controlled amplifier, and a device for inserting electrodes in well. Under integrated computer control, this instrument passes user-programmed electrical stimulus protocols to cells within the wells of the microtiter plate.
  • Reagents
  • Assay buffer #1
  • 140 mM NaCl, 4.5 mM KCl, 2 mM CaCl2, 1 mM MgCl2, 10 mM HEPES, 10 mM glucose, pH 7.40, 330 mOsm
    Pluronic stock (1000×): 100 mg/mL pluronic 127 in dry DMSO
    Oxonol stock (3333×): 10 mM DiSBAC2(3) in dry DMSO
    Coumarin stock (1000×): 10 mM CC2-DMPE in dry DMSO
    ABSC1 stock (400×): 200 mM ABSC1 in water
  • Assay Protocol
      • 1. Insert or use electrodes into each well to be assayed.
      • 2. Use the current-controlled amplifier to deliver stimulation wave pulses for 3 s. Two seconds of pre-stimulus recording are performed to obtain the un-stimulated intensities. Five seconds of post-stimulation recording are performed to examine the relaxation to the resting state.
  • Data Analysis
  • Data are analyzed and reported as normalized ratios of background-subtracted emission intensities measured in the 460 nm and 580 nm channels. Background intensities are then subtracted from each assay channel. Background intensities are obtained by measuring the emission intensities during the same time periods from identically treated assay wells in which there are no cells. The response as a function of time is then reported as the ratios obtained using the following formula:
  • R ( t ) = ( intensity 460 n m - background 460 n m ) ( intensity 580 n m - background 580 n m )
  • The data is further reduced by calculating the initial (Ri) and final (Rf) ratios. These are the average ratio values during part or all of the pre-stimulation period, and during sample points during the stimulation period. The response to the stimulus R=Rf/Ri is then calculated.
  • Control responses are obtained by performing assays in the presence of a compound with the desired properties (positive control), such as tetracaine, and in the absence of pharmacological agents (negative control). Responses to the negative (N) and positive (P) controls are calculated as above. The compound antagonist activity A is defined as:
  • A = R - P N - P * 100.
  • where R is the ratio response of the test compound.
  • Electrophysiology assays for NaV Activity and Inhibition of Test Compounds
  • Patch clamp electrophysiology was used to assess the efficacy and selectivity of sodium channel blockers in dorsal root ganglion neurons. Rat neurons were isolated from the dorsal root ganglions and maintained in culture for 2 to 10 days in the presence of NGF (50 ng/ml) (culture media consisted of NeurobasalA supplemented with B27, glutamine and antibiotics). Small diameter neurons (nociceptors, 8-12 μm in diameter) have been visually identified and probed with fine tip glass electrodes connected to an amplifier (Axon Instruments). The “voltage clamp” mode has been used to assess the compound's IC50 holding the cells at −60 mV. In addition, the “current clamp” mode has been employed to test the efficacy of the compounds in blocking action potential generation in response to current injections. The results of these experiments have contributed to the definition of the efficacy profile of the compounds.
  • VOLTAGE-CLAMP Assay in DRG Neurons
  • TTX-resistant sodium currents were recorded from DRG somata using the whole-cell variation of the patch clamp technique. Recordings were made at room temperature (˜22° C.) with thick walled borosilicate glass electrodes (WPI; resistance 3-4 MΩ) using an Axopatch 200B amplifier (Axon Instruments). After establishing the whole-cell configuration, approximately 15 minutes were allowed for the pipette solution to equilibrate within the cell before beginning recording. Currents were lowpass filtered between 2-5 kHz and digitally sampled at 10 kHz. Series resistance was compensated 60-70% and was monitored continuously throughout the experiment. The liquid junction potential (−7 mV) between the intracellular pipette solution and the external recording solution was not accounted for in the data analysis. Test solutions were applied to the cells with a gravity driven fast perfusion system (SF-77; Warner Instruments).
  • Dose-response relationships were determined in voltage clamp mode by repeatedly depolarizing the cell from the experiment specific holding potential to a test potential of +10 mV once every 60 seconds. Blocking effects were allowed to plateau before proceeding to the next test concentration.
  • Solutions
  • Intracellular solution (in mM): Cs—F (130), NaCl (10), MgCl2 (1), EGTA (1.5), CaCl2 (0.1), HEPES (10), glucose (2), pH=7.42, 290 mOsm.
  • Extracellular solution (in mM): NaCl (138), CaCl2 (1.26), KCl (5.33), KH2PO4 (0.44), MgCl2 (0.5), MgSO4 (0.41), NaHCO3 (4), Na2HPO4 (0.3), glucose (5.6), HEPES (10), CdCl2 (0.4), NiCl2 (0.1), TTX (0.25×10−3).
  • CURRENT-CLAMP Assay for NaV Channel Inhibition Activity of Compounds
  • Cells were current-clamped in whole-cell configuration with a Multiplamp 700A amplifier (Axon Inst). Borosilicate pipettes (4-5 MOhm) were filled with (in mM): 150 K-gluconate, 10 NaCl, 0.1 EGTA, 10 Hepes, 2 MgCl2, (buffered to pH 7.34 with KOH). Cells were bathed in (in mM): 140 NaCl, 3 KCl, 1 MgCl, 1 CaCl, and 10 Hepes). Pipette potential was zeroed before seal formation; liquid junction potentials were not corrected during acquisition. Recordings were made at room temperature.
  • Compounds of the invention as depicted generally herein and in Table 2 were found to inhibit voltage-gated sodium channels at 25.0 μM or less.
  • Assays for Detecting and Measuring CaV Inhibition Properties of Compounds
  • A) Optical Methods for Assaying CaV Inhibition Properties of Compounds:
  • Compounds of the invention are useful as antagonists of voltage-gated calcium ion channels. Antagonist properties of test compounds were assessed as follows. Cells expressing the CaV of interest were placed into microtiter plates. After an incubation period, the cells were stained with fluorescent dyes sensitive to the transmembrane potential. The test compounds were added to the microtiter plate. The cells were stimulated with electrical means to evoke a CaV dependent membrane potential change from unblocked channels, which was detected and measured with trans-membrane potential-sensitive dyes. Antagonists were detected as a decreased membrane potential response to the stimulus. The optical membrane potential assay utilized voltage-sensitive FRET sensors described by Gonzalez and Tsien (See, Gonzalez, J. E. and R. Y. Tsien (1995) “Voltage sensing by fluorescence resonance energy transfer in single cells” Biophys J 69(4): 1272-80, and Gonzalez, J. E. and R. Y. Tsien (1997) “Improved indicators of cell membrane potential that use fluorescence resonance energy transfer” Chem Biol 4(4): 269-77) in combination with instrumentation for measuring fluorescence changes such as the Voltage/Ion Probe Reader (VIPR®) (See, Gonzalez, J. E., K. Oades, et al. (1999) “Cell-based assays and instrumentation for screening ion-channel targets” Drug Discov Today 4(9): 431-439).
  • VIPR® optical membrane potential assay method with electrical stimulation
  • The following is an example of how CaV2.2 inhibition activity is measured using the optical membrane potential method. Other subtypes are performed in an analogous mode in a cell line expressing the CaV of interest.
  • HEK293 cells stably expressing CaV2.2 are plated into 96-well microtiter plates. After an appropriate incubation period, the cells are stained with the voltage sensitive dyes CC2-DMPE/DiSBAC2(3) as follows.
  • Reagents:
  • 100 mg/mL Pluronic F-127 (Sigma #P2443), in dry DMSO
  • 10 mM DiSBAC6(3) (Aurora #00-100-010) in dry DMSO 10 mM CC2-DMPE (Aurora #00-100-008) in dry DMSO 200 mM Acid Yellow 17 (Aurora #VABSC) in H2O 370 mM Barium Chloride (Sigma Cat#B6394) in H2O Bath X 160 mM NaCl (Sigma Cat#S-9888) 4.5 mM KCl (Sigma Cat#P-5405) 1 mM MgCl2 (Fluka Cat#63064) 10 mM HEPES (Sigma Cat#H-4034)
  • pH 7.4 using NaOH
  • Loading Rotocol:
  • 2×CC2-DMPE=20 μM CC2-DMPE: 10 mM CC2-DMPE is vortexed with an equivalent volume of 10% pluronic, followed by vortexing in required amount of HBSS containing 10 mM HEPES. Each cell plate will require 5 mL of 2×CC2-DMPE. 50 μL of 2×CC2-DMPE is added to wells containing washed cells, resulting in a 10 μM final staining concentration. The cells are stained for 30 minutes in the dark at RT.
  • 2×CC2DMPE & DISBAC6(3)=8 μM CC2DMPE & 2. 5 μM DISBAC6(3): Vortex together both dyes with an equivalent volume of 10% pluronic (in DMSO). Vortex in required amount of Bath X with beta-cyclodextrin. Each 96well cell plate will require 5 ml of 2×CC2DMPE. Wash plate with EL×405 with Bath X, leaving a residual volume of 50 μL/well. Add 50 μL of 2×CC2DMPE & DISBAC6(3) to each well. Stain for 30 minutes in the dark at RT.
  • 1. 5× AY17=750 μM AY17 with 15 mM BaCl2: Add Acid Yellow 17 to vessel containing Bath X. Mix well. Allow solution to sit for 10 minutes. Slowly mix in 370 mM BaCl2. This solution can be used to solvate compound plates. Note that compound plates are made at 1.5× drug concentration and not the usual 2×. Wash CC2 stained plate, again, leaving residual volume of 50 μL. Add 100 uL/well of the AY17 solution. Stain for 15 minutes in the dark at RT. Run plate on the optical reader.
  • The electrical stimulation instrument and methods of use are described in ION Channel Assay Methods PCT/US01/21652, herein incorporated by reference. The instrument comprises a microtiter plate handler, an optical system for exciting the coumarin dye while simultaneously recording the coumarin and oxonol emissions, a waveform generator, a current- or voltage-controlled amplifier, and a device for inserting electrodes in well. Under integrated computer control, this instrument passes user-programmed electrical stimulus protocols to cells within the wells of the microtiter plate.
  • Assay Protocol
  • Insert or use electrodes into each well to be assayed.
  • Use the current-controlled amplifier to deliver stimulation wave pulses for 3-5 s. Two seconds of pre-stimulus recording are performed to obtain the un-stimulated intensities. Five seconds of post-stimulation recording are performed to examine the relaxation to the resting state.
  • Data Analysis
  • Data are analyzed and reported as normalized ratios of background-subtracted emission intensities measured in the 460 nm and 580 nm channels. Background intensities are then subtracted from each assay channel. Background intensities are obtained by measuring the emission intensities during the same time periods from identically treated assay wells in which there are no cells. The response as a function of time is then reported as the ratios obtained using the following formula:
  • R ( t ) = ( intensity 460 n m - background 460 n m ) ( intensity 580 n m - background 580 n m )
  • The data is further reduced by calculating the initial (Ri) and final (Rf) ratios. These are the average ratio values during part or all of the pre-stimulation period, and during sample points during the stimulation period. The response to the stimulus R=Rf/Ri is then calculated.
  • Control responses are obtained by performing assays in the presence of a compound with the desired properties (positive control), such as mibefradil, and in the absence of pharmacological agents (negative control). Responses to the negative (N) and positive (P) controls are calculated as above. The compound antagonist activity A is defined as:
  • A = R - P N - P * 100.
  • where R is the ratio response of the test compound.
  • Electrophysiology Assays for CaV Activity and Inhibition of Test Compounds
  • Patch clamp electrophysiology was used to assess the efficacy of calcium channel blockers expressed in HEK293 cells. HEK293 cells expressing CaV2.2 have been visually identified and probed with fine tip glass electrodes connected to an amplifier (Axon Instruments). The “voltage clamp” mode has been used to assess the compound's IC50 holding the cells at −100 mV. The results of these experiments have contributed to the definition of the efficacy profile of the compounds.
  • VOLTAGE-CLAMP Assay in HEK293 Cells Expressing CaV2.2
  • CaV2.2 calcium currents were recorded from HEK293 cells using the whole-cell variation of the patch clamp technique. Recordings were made at room temperature (˜22° C.) with thick walled borosilicate glass electrodes (WPI; resistance 3-4 MΩ) using an Axopatch 200B amplifier (Axon Instruments). After establishing the whole-cell configuration, approximately 15 minutes were allowed for the pipette solution to equilibrate within the cell before beginning recording. Currents were lowpass filtered between 2-5 kHz and digitally sampled at 10 kHz. Series resistance was compensated 60-70% and was monitored continuously throughout the experiment. The liquid junction potential (−7 mV) between the intracellular pipette solution and the external recording solution was not accounted for in the data analysis. Test solutions were applied to the cells with a gravity driven fast perfusion system (SF-77; Warner Instruments).
  • Dose-response relationships were determined in voltage clamp mode by repeatedly depolarizing the cell from the experiment specific holding potential to a test potential of +20 mV for 50 ms at frequencies of 0.1, 1, 5, 10, 15, and 20 Hz. Blocking effects were allowed to plateau before proceeding to the next test concentration.
  • Solutions
  • Intracellular solution (in mM): Cs—F (130), NaCl (10), MgCl2 (1), EGTA (1.5), CaCl2 (0.1), HEPES (10), glucose (2), pH=7.42, 290 mOsm.
  • Extracellular solution (in mM): NaCl (138), BaCl2 (10), KCl (5.33), KH2PO4 (0.44), MgCl2 (0.5), MgSO4 (0.41), NaHCO3 (4), Na2HPO4 (0.3), glucose (5.6), HEPES (10).
  • Following these procedures, representative compounds of the present invention were found to possess desired N-type calcium channel modulation activity and selectivity.

Claims (12)

1-135. (canceled)
136. A method of treating or lessening the severity of a disease, disorder, or condition selected from acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain, arthritis, migraine, cluster headaches, trigeminal neuralgia, herpetic neuralgia, general neuralgias, epilepsy or epileptic conditions, neurodegenerative disorders, psychiatric disorders such as anxiety and depression, myotonia, arrhythmia, movement disorders, neuroendocrine disorders, ataxia, multiple sclerosis, irritable bowel syndrome, incontinence, visceral pain, osteoarthritis pain, postherpetic neuralgia, diabetic neuropathy, radicular pain, sciatica, back pain, head or neck pain, severe or intractable pain, nociceptive pain, breakthrough pain, postsurgical pain, or cancer pain, comprising the step of administering to said patient an effective amount of a compound according of formula III-B:
Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00225
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form a ring selected from
Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00226
x is 1-2;
z is 0-3;
each occurrence of R4 is independently C1-4 alkyl optionally substituted with hydroxy, C1-4 alkoxy, halo, C1-4 alkylcarbonyloxy or carbo(C1-4alkoxy);
each occurrence of R5 is independently halo, oxo, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, —O—C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 alkyl optionally substituted with hydroxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, di(C1-4alkyl)aminocarbonyl
R7 is selected from —OH, —OCH3, —OC(O)CH3, —OP(O)(ONa)2, or —OC(O)NHCH3;
each occurrence of R′ is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-8 aliphatic, C6-10 aryl, a heteroaryl ring having 5-10 ring atoms, or a heterocyclyl ring having 3-10 ring atoms; and
each occurrence of R6 is independently R′, —COR′, —CO2(C1-6 aliphatic), —CON(R′)2, or —SO2R′.
137. (canceled)
138. The method according to claim 136, wherein the disease, condition, or disorder is implicated in the activation or hyperactivity of voltage-gated sodium channels.
139. The method according to claim 136, wherein the disease, condition, or disorder is implicated in the activation or hyperactivity of voltage-gated calcium channels.
140. The method according to claim 139, wherein the disease, condition, or disorder is acute, chronic, neuropathic, or inflammatory pain.
141. The method according to claim 136, wherein the disease, condition, or disorder is radicular pain, sciatica, back pain, head pain, or neck pain.
142. The method according to claim 136, wherein the disease, condition, or disorder is severe or intractable pain, acute pain, post-surgical pain, back pain, or cancer pain.
143. A method of inhibiting one or more of NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9, or CaV2.2 activity in:
(a) a patient; or
(b) a biological sample;
which method comprising administering to said patient, or contacting said biological sample with a compound of formula III-B:
Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00227
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
R1 and R2, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form a ring selected from
Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00228
x is 1-2;
z is 0-3;
each occurrence of R4 is independently C1-4alkyl optionally substituted with hydroxy, C1-4 alkoxy, halo, C1-4 alkylcarbonyloxy or carbo(C1-4alkoxy);
each occurrence of R5 is independently halo, oxo, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, —O—C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 alkyl optionally substituted with hydroxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, di(C1-4alkyl)aminocarbonyl
R7 is selected from —OH, —OCH3, —OC(O)CH3, —OP(O)(ONa)2, or —OC(O)NHCH3;
each occurrence of R′ is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-8 aliphatic, C6-10 aryl, a heteroaryl ring having 5-10 ring atoms, or a heterocyclyl ring having 3-10 ring atoms; and
each occurrence of R6 is independently R′, —COR′, —CO2(C1-6 aliphatic), —CON(R′)2, or —SO2R′.
144. (canceled)
145. The method according to claim 136 or 143, wherein said compound is selected from
Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00229
Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00230
Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00231
Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00232
Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00233
Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00234
Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00235
Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00236
Figure US20120040935A1-20120216-C00237
146. (canceled)
US13/110,173 2003-08-05 2011-05-18 Compositions useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated ion channels Abandoned US20120040935A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13/110,173 US20120040935A1 (en) 2003-08-05 2011-05-18 Compositions useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated ion channels

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US49303603P 2003-08-05 2003-08-05
US10/912,912 US7968545B2 (en) 2003-08-05 2004-08-05 Compositions useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated ion channels
US13/110,173 US20120040935A1 (en) 2003-08-05 2011-05-18 Compositions useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated ion channels

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/912,912 Division US7968545B2 (en) 2003-08-05 2004-08-05 Compositions useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated ion channels

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20120040935A1 true US20120040935A1 (en) 2012-02-16

Family

ID=34135197

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/912,912 Expired - Fee Related US7968545B2 (en) 2003-08-05 2004-08-05 Compositions useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated ion channels
US13/110,173 Abandoned US20120040935A1 (en) 2003-08-05 2011-05-18 Compositions useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated ion channels

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/912,912 Expired - Fee Related US7968545B2 (en) 2003-08-05 2004-08-05 Compositions useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated ion channels

Country Status (18)

Country Link
US (2) US7968545B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1663994B1 (en)
JP (2) JP4808156B2 (en)
KR (1) KR20060118398A (en)
CN (1) CN1894222A (en)
AR (1) AR045445A1 (en)
AT (1) ATE548358T1 (en)
AU (1) AU2004263515A1 (en)
CA (1) CA2554566A1 (en)
IL (1) IL173528A0 (en)
MX (1) MXPA06001494A (en)
NO (1) NO20061080L (en)
NZ (1) NZ545717A (en)
PE (1) PE20050355A1 (en)
RU (1) RU2006106710A (en)
TW (1) TW200521119A (en)
WO (1) WO2005014558A1 (en)
ZA (1) ZA200601859B (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8372842B2 (en) 2008-01-09 2013-02-12 Array Biopharma Inc. Pyrazolopyridines as kinase inhibitors
US8841304B2 (en) 2008-01-08 2014-09-23 Array Biopharma, Inc. Pyrrolopyridines as kinase inhibitors

Families Citing this family (66)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
AU7106296A (en) * 1996-09-04 1998-03-26 Intertrust Technologies Corp. Trusted infrastructure support systems, methods and techniques for secure electronic commerce, electronic transactions, commerce process control and automation, distributed computing, and rights management
US7235551B2 (en) * 2000-03-02 2007-06-26 Smithkline Beecham Corporation 1,5-disubstituted-3,4-dihydro-1h-pyrimido[4,5-d]pyrimidin-2-one compounds and their use in treating csbp/p38 kinase mediated diseases
CZ20031125A3 (en) * 2000-10-23 2003-10-15 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Novel compounds
PL373339A1 (en) * 2002-04-19 2005-08-22 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Novel compounds
AR045445A1 (en) * 2003-08-05 2005-10-26 Vertex Pharma IONINIBID COMPOUNDS OF IONIC CHANNELS REGULATED BY VOLTAGE
JP4862654B2 (en) * 2004-10-08 2012-01-25 アステラス製薬株式会社 Aromatic ring fused pyrimidine derivatives
TW200621257A (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-07-01 Astellas Pharma Inc Pyrimidine derivative fused with nonaromatic ring
US20060128710A1 (en) * 2004-12-09 2006-06-15 Chih-Hung Lee Antagonists to the vanilloid receptor subtype 1 (VR1) and uses thereof
EP1856061B1 (en) * 2005-03-11 2011-01-26 Merck Patent GmbH Tetrahydro- and dihydroquinazolinones
US7297700B2 (en) 2005-03-24 2007-11-20 Renovis, Inc. Bicycloheteroaryl compounds as P2X7 modulators and uses thereof
EA200702073A1 (en) 2005-03-25 2008-12-30 Глэксо Груп Лимитед Method of producing pyrido [2,3-d] pyrimidine-7-bp and 3,4-dihidropyrimido [4,5-d] pyrmidin-2 (1h) -onovy derivatives
AR053346A1 (en) 2005-03-25 2007-05-02 Glaxo Group Ltd COMPOSITE DERIVED FROM 8H -PIRIDO (2,3-D) PIRIMIDIN -7 ONA 2,4,8- TRISUSTITUTED PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION AND USE TO PREPARE A COMPOSITION FOR TREATMENT AND PROFILXIS OF A DISEASE MEDIATED BY KINASE CSBP / RK / P38
UY29439A1 (en) 2005-03-25 2006-10-02 Glaxo Group Ltd NEW COMPOUNDS
JP2008535822A (en) 2005-03-25 2008-09-04 グラクソ グループ リミテッド New compounds
US7745451B2 (en) * 2005-05-04 2010-06-29 Renovis, Inc. Tetrahydronaphthyridine and tetrahydropyrido[4,3-d]pyrimidine compounds and compositions thereof useful in the treatment of conditions associated with neurological and inflammatory disorders and dysfunctions
JP5388574B2 (en) 2005-05-31 2014-01-15 バーテックス ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Heterocyclics useful as modulators of ion channels
AU2006317545B2 (en) 2005-11-23 2012-04-12 Aros Pharma Aps Compositions and methods for modulating gated ion channels
PE20080145A1 (en) 2006-03-21 2008-02-11 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv TETRAHYDRO-PYRIMIDOAZEPINE AS MODULATORS OF TRPV1
CA2644910C (en) 2006-03-31 2014-01-28 Abbott Laboratories Indazole compounds
CA2652307A1 (en) * 2006-04-10 2007-10-18 Painceptor Pharma Corporation Compositions and methods for modulating gated ion channels
GB0608820D0 (en) 2006-05-04 2006-06-14 Piramed Ltd Pharmaceutical compounds
CA2654842A1 (en) * 2006-06-12 2007-12-21 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Thienopyrimidines useful as modulators of ion channels
WO2008005303A2 (en) * 2006-06-30 2008-01-10 Janssen Pharmaceutica N.V. Thiazolopyrimidine modulators of trpv1
US8063050B2 (en) 2006-07-06 2011-11-22 Array Biopharma Inc. Hydroxylated and methoxylated pyrimidyl cyclopentanes as AKT protein kinase inhibitors
DK2054418T3 (en) 2006-07-06 2012-02-27 Array Biopharma Inc Dihydrothienopyrimidines as AKT protein kinase inhibitors
AU2007269052B2 (en) 2006-07-06 2014-10-23 Array Biopharma Inc. Cyclopenta [D] pyrimidines as AKT protein kinase inhibitors
CN101511842B (en) 2006-07-06 2012-10-31 阵列生物制药公司 Dihydrofuro pyrimidines as AKT protein kinase inhibitors
NZ581309A (en) * 2007-05-25 2012-02-24 Vertex Pharma Ion channel modulators and methods of use
US9409886B2 (en) 2007-07-05 2016-08-09 Array Biopharma Inc. Pyrimidyl cyclopentanes as AKT protein kinase inhibitors
US8846683B2 (en) 2007-07-05 2014-09-30 Array Biopharma, Inc. Pyrimidyl cyclopentanes as Akt protein kinase inhibitors
KR20150089099A (en) 2007-07-05 2015-08-04 어레이 바이오파마 인크. Pyrimidyl cyclopentanes as akt protein kinase inhibitors
ES2533557T3 (en) 2007-07-05 2015-04-13 Array Biopharma, Inc. Pyrimidyl cyclopentanes as AKT protein kinase inhibitors
JP5562865B2 (en) 2007-12-17 2014-07-30 ジヤンセン・フアーマシユーチカ・ナームローゼ・フエンノートシヤツプ TRPV1 imidazolo-, oxazolo-, and thiazolopyrimidine modulators
US8853216B2 (en) 2008-01-09 2014-10-07 Array Biopharma, Inc. Hydroxylated pyrimidyl cyclopentane as AKT protein kinase inhibitor
NZ586346A (en) 2008-01-09 2012-02-24 Array Biopharma Inc Hydroxylated pyrimidyl cyclopentanes as akt protein kinase inhibitors
GB0813144D0 (en) 2008-07-17 2008-08-27 Glaxo Group Ltd Novel compounds
RU2473549C2 (en) * 2008-07-31 2013-01-27 Дженентек, Инк. Pyrimidine compounds, compositions and methods of use
CN102480961A (en) * 2009-06-24 2012-05-30 健泰科生物技术公司 Oxo-heterocycle fused pyrimidine compounds, compositions and methods of use
CA2774715C (en) 2009-07-27 2018-04-03 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Fused heterocyclic compounds as ion channel modulators
CN102712642B (en) * 2009-11-12 2015-08-12 霍夫曼-拉罗奇有限公司 The purine that N-7 replaces and Pyrazolopyrimidine compound, composition and using method
BR112012011188A2 (en) * 2009-11-12 2021-06-29 F.Hoffmann - La Roche Ag ''compound, pharmaceutical composition and use of a compound"
NZ604478A (en) 2010-07-02 2014-12-24 Gilead Sciences Inc Fused heterocyclic compounds as ion channel modulators
BR112013014914B8 (en) 2010-12-16 2020-08-04 Hoffmann La Roche compound, pharmaceutical composition and use of a compound
CN103492575A (en) 2011-01-18 2014-01-01 安姆根有限公司 Nav1.7 knockout mice and uses thereof
WO2012099581A1 (en) 2011-01-19 2012-07-26 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dihydrofuropyrimidine compounds
UY33959A (en) 2011-03-16 2012-09-28 Amgen Inc POWERFUL AND SELECTIVE INHIBITORS OF NaV1.3 AND NaV1.7
CN104586861A (en) 2011-04-01 2015-05-06 基因泰克公司 Combinations of akt inhibitor compounds and abiraterone, and methods of use
CN103841976A (en) 2011-04-01 2014-06-04 基因泰克公司 Combinations of AKT AND MEK inhibitor compounds, and methods of use
EA028156B9 (en) 2011-05-10 2018-01-31 Джилид Сайэнс, Инк. Fused heterocyclic compounds as ion channel modulators
NO3175985T3 (en) 2011-07-01 2018-04-28
TWI478908B (en) 2011-07-01 2015-04-01 Gilead Sciences Inc Fused heterocyclic compounds as ion channel modulators
US8846656B2 (en) 2011-07-22 2014-09-30 Novartis Ag Tetrahydropyrido-pyridine and tetrahydropyrido-pyrimidine compounds and use thereof as C5a receptor modulators
ES2661585T3 (en) * 2012-10-31 2018-04-02 Raqualia Pharma Inc Pyrazolopyridine derivatives as TTX-S blockers
AR096927A1 (en) 2013-03-12 2016-02-10 Amgen Inc POWERFUL AND SELECTIVE INHIBITORS OF NaV1.7
EP2970408B1 (en) 2013-03-12 2018-01-10 Amgen Inc. Potent and selective inhibitors of nav1.7
TW201512189A (en) 2013-04-16 2015-04-01 Gruenenthal Chemie Novel substituted condensed pyrimidine compounds
EP3019478B1 (en) * 2013-07-10 2020-01-15 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Inc. Fused piperidine amides as modulators of ion channels
EA031317B1 (en) * 2014-01-20 2018-12-28 Клив Байосайенсиз, Инк. FUSED PYRIMIDINES AS INHIBITORS OF p97 COMPLEX
JP6532474B2 (en) 2014-02-06 2019-06-19 アッヴィ・インコーポレイテッド 6-heteroaryloxy- and 6-aryloxy-quinoline-2-carboxamides and their use
MX2017011042A (en) * 2015-03-02 2018-03-02 Amgen Inc Bicyclic ketone sulfonamide compounds.
US10435645B2 (en) * 2016-12-20 2019-10-08 International Flavors & Fragrances Inc. Organoleptic compounds
SG11202101441SA (en) * 2018-08-24 2021-03-30 Jaguahr Therapeutics Pte Ltd Tetrahydropyridopyrimidine derivatives as ahr modulators
WO2021173082A1 (en) * 2020-02-26 2021-09-02 Jaguahr Therapeutics Pte Ltd Pyridopyrimidine derivatives useful in modulation of ahr signalling
EP4143178A1 (en) * 2020-04-28 2023-03-08 Global Blood Therapeutics, Inc. Cycloalkyl pyrimidines as ferroportin inhibitors
WO2022165079A1 (en) * 2021-01-27 2022-08-04 Sri International Genetically engineered electrically-stimulated effector cells for in situ synthesis of proteins
CN113880859B (en) * 2021-11-16 2022-06-21 江西科技师范大学 2-aryl-4-arylmethylamino pyrimidine compound and application thereof

Family Cites Families (34)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR2450E (en) * 1903-02-09 1904-04-07 Sulzer Freres Soc Bearing for pumps and other similar machines
DE1197466B (en) * 1962-03-22 1965-07-29 Thomae Gmbh Dr K Process for the preparation of new 5, 6, 7, 8-tetrahydropyrido- [4, 3-d] pyrimidines
DE1470336A1 (en) * 1962-07-04 1969-03-20 Thomae Gmbh Dr K Novel dihydrothieno- [3,4-d] pyrimidines and processes for their preparation
DE1251765B (en) * 1963-07-23 1967-10-12 Dr Karl Thomae Gesellschaft mit beschrankter Haftung Biberach/Riß Process for the preparation of new 5H - dihydrothiopyrano [4 3 d] pynmidines
US3346452A (en) * 1963-08-19 1967-10-10 Ciba Geigy Corp 5, 6-lower alkylene-pyrimidines
FR1455810A (en) * 1963-12-16 1966-05-20 Thomae Gmbh Dr K Process for making new 4-h-m-dithiino [5, 4-d] pyrimidines
DE1470354A1 (en) * 1963-12-16 1969-10-09 Thomae Gmbh Dr K New 4H-m-Dithiino [5,4-d] -pyrimidines and process for their preparation
GB1152883A (en) * 1967-01-25 1969-05-21 Ucb Sa 4,5-Polymethylene-Pyrimidine Derivatives
FR2190818B1 (en) * 1972-06-28 1975-03-07 Roussel Uclaf
EP0022481A1 (en) * 1979-06-21 1981-01-21 Mitsubishi Yuka Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. 5,6-Alkylenepyrimidine derivatives, processes for preparing the same and pharmaceutical compositions
JPS562968A (en) * 1979-06-21 1981-01-13 Mitsubishi Yuka Yakuhin Kk Novel pyrimidine derivative
JPS60226882A (en) 1984-04-24 1985-11-12 Nippon Zoki Pharmaceut Co Ltd Novel pyrimidopyrimidine derivative
DE3609596A1 (en) * 1986-03-21 1987-10-01 Hoechst Ag 2-AZOLYLMETHYL-2-ARYL-1,3-DIOXOLANE AND THE SALTS THEREOF, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF, MEANS CONTAINING IT AND THEIR USE
EP0276057B1 (en) 1987-01-21 1994-03-09 Merck & Co. Inc. Piperazinylpyrimidines as beta-adrenergic receptor blocking agents
DE3922735A1 (en) * 1989-07-11 1991-01-24 Hoechst Ag AMINOPYRIMIDINE DERIVATIVES, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF, THE AGENTS CONTAINING THEY AND THEIR USE AS FUNGICIDES
DE4029654A1 (en) * 1990-09-19 1992-04-02 Hoechst Ag 2-PHENYL-PYRIMIDINE, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF, AGENTS CONTAINING IT AND THEIR USE AS FUNGICIDES
JPH04224580A (en) * 1990-12-25 1992-08-13 Nippon Soda Co Ltd Pyrimidine derivative, production thereof and agricultural and horticultural fungicide
US5536725A (en) * 1993-08-25 1996-07-16 Fmc Corporation Insecticidal substituted-2,4-diamino-5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinazolines
JPH07228573A (en) * 1994-02-16 1995-08-29 Dainippon Pharmaceut Co Ltd 2-phenylcycloalkanopyrimidine derivative
IL117659A (en) 1995-04-13 2000-12-06 Dainippon Pharmaceutical Co Substituted 2-phenyl pyrimidino amino acetamide derivative process for preparing the same and a pharmaceutical composition containing same
JP3531169B2 (en) * 1996-06-11 2004-05-24 三菱ウェルファーマ株式会社 Fused heterocyclic compounds and their pharmaceutical uses
JPH10130150A (en) * 1996-09-05 1998-05-19 Dainippon Pharmaceut Co Ltd Medicine comprising acetic acid amide derivative
ZA9810490B (en) * 1997-12-03 1999-05-20 Dainippon Pharmaceutical Co 2-Aryl-8-oxodihydropurine derivative process for the preparation thereof pharmaceutical composition containing the same and intermediate therefor
JPH11171865A (en) * 1997-12-04 1999-06-29 Yoshitomi Pharmaceut Ind Ltd Condensed heterocyclic compound
DE19853278A1 (en) * 1998-11-19 2000-05-25 Aventis Pharma Gmbh New 4-amino-2-aryl-cyclopentapyrimidine derivatives are activators of soluble guanylate cyclase, useful for treating or preventing e.g. thrombosis and restenosis
DE19904710A1 (en) * 1999-02-05 2000-08-10 Aventis Pharma Gmbh Substituted 4-amino-2-aryl-tetrahydroquinazolines, their preparation, their use and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
DE60128709T2 (en) * 2000-09-15 2007-12-27 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Inc., Cambridge TRIAZOL COMPOUNDS AS PROTEIN KINASE INHIBITORS
CA2465326C (en) * 2001-11-01 2011-03-29 Icagen, Inc. Pyrazolopyrimidines for decreasing ion flow through a voltage-dependent sodium channel
EP1474147B1 (en) 2001-12-07 2010-05-05 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Pyrimidine-based compounds useful as gsk-3 inhibitors
AU2003220299A1 (en) * 2002-03-15 2003-09-29 Vertex Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Azinylaminoazoles as inhibitors of protein kinases
DE60332604D1 (en) * 2002-03-15 2010-07-01 Vertex Pharma AZOLYLAMINOAZINE AS PROTEIN KINASE INHIBITOR
WO2003078426A1 (en) * 2002-03-15 2003-09-25 Vertex Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Azolylaminoazine as inhibitors of protein kinases
JP2006521398A (en) * 2003-03-28 2006-09-21 サイオス・インコーポレーテツド Bicyclic pyrimidine inhibitors of TGFβ
AR045445A1 (en) * 2003-08-05 2005-10-26 Vertex Pharma IONINIBID COMPOUNDS OF IONIC CHANNELS REGULATED BY VOLTAGE

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Davies, et al., Trends in Pharmacolog. Sciences, Vol. 28, No. 5, 2007, 220-228 *
Dichgans, et al., www.thelancet.com, Vol. 366 July 30, 2005 *
Wood, et al., J. Neurobiol., Vol, 61, # 1, 7 SEP 2004 *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8841304B2 (en) 2008-01-08 2014-09-23 Array Biopharma, Inc. Pyrrolopyridines as kinase inhibitors
US8372842B2 (en) 2008-01-09 2013-02-12 Array Biopharma Inc. Pyrazolopyridines as kinase inhibitors

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN1894222A (en) 2007-01-10
NZ545717A (en) 2009-12-24
JP4808156B2 (en) 2011-11-02
JP2011207914A (en) 2011-10-20
US20050187217A1 (en) 2005-08-25
CA2554566A1 (en) 2005-02-17
WO2005014558A1 (en) 2005-02-17
EP1663994A1 (en) 2006-06-07
IL173528A0 (en) 2006-07-05
NO20061080L (en) 2006-04-19
US7968545B2 (en) 2011-06-28
AR045445A1 (en) 2005-10-26
RU2006106710A (en) 2007-09-20
EP1663994B1 (en) 2012-03-07
ATE548358T1 (en) 2012-03-15
TW200521119A (en) 2005-07-01
KR20060118398A (en) 2006-11-23
JP2007501258A (en) 2007-01-25
ZA200601859B (en) 2008-03-26
PE20050355A1 (en) 2005-05-16
MXPA06001494A (en) 2007-05-11
AU2004263515A1 (en) 2005-02-17

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7968545B2 (en) Compositions useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated ion channels
EP1608632B1 (en) Quinazolines useful as modulators of ion channels
US8324220B2 (en) Pyrimidines useful as modulators of voltage-gated ion channels
US8309543B2 (en) Compositions useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated sodium channels
US7615563B2 (en) Compositions useful as inhibitors of voltage-gated sodium channels
US8153642B2 (en) Quinazolines useful as modulators of ion channels
US20100249100A1 (en) Quinazolines useful as modulators of ion channels
AU2011250764A1 (en) Condensed Pyrimidine Compounds As Inhibitors Of Voltage-Gated Ion Channels

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION